JP2011156238A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To improve game amusements by performances using various operation means. <P>SOLUTION: Of an operation performance A-1 or an operation performance A-2 using a stick controller including an operation rod capable of an indicating operation (tilting operation) in multiple directions and a trigger button provided on the predetermined position of the operation rod and capable of a predetermined indicating operation (push-pull operation) and an operation performance B or an operation performance C-1 using a push button provided on a predetermined position different from the operation rod and capable of a predetermined indicating operation (pressing operation), which operation performance is to be executed is determined by a different ratio according to an operation item buffer value updated by the setting of a player and an operation history and the variable display form of decorative symbols, etc. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, the present invention relates to a plurality of discriminating devices based on the establishment of a start condition that allows the start of variable display after a game medium passes through a predetermined start area. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that includes variable display means for variably displaying types of identification information and deriving and displaying a display result, and that can give a predetermined game value based on the display result of the identification information.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area and a start condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of identification are made. There is a pachinko gaming machine in which information (hereinafter referred to as a display symbol) is variably displayed on a variable display device, and the game interest is enhanced by a so-called variable display game that determines whether or not to give a predetermined game value based on the display result. . In such a pachinko gaming machine, a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player is obtained when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode. . For example, a pachinko gaming machine that has been in a big hit gaming state has a special electric player called a big prize opening or an attacking state in an open state, and a gaming state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player by making the winning of a game ball extremely easy. Provide continuously for a certain period of time.

  In such a gaming machine, a game operation member is assembled on a predetermined arrangement surface, and a first operation for changing a game state by pressing a game operation portion of the game operation member in a direction substantially perpendicular to the arrangement surface, and the game There has been proposed one that enables a second operation to change the gaming state by pressing the operation unit in a substantially horizontal direction with respect to the arrangement surface (for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, in such a gaming machine, a joystick and a push button are provided on the front surface thereof, and the character image displayed on the display unit is moved in a direction according to the operation of the joystick. It has been proposed to perform the operation (for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2007-175118 A JP 2004-344228 A

  With the technique described in Patent Document 1, the gaming state can only be changed depending on the direction in which the gaming operation unit is pressed. With the technique described in Patent Document 2, it is only possible to execute a certain effect by operating both the joystick and the push button. For this reason, there is a problem that the production effect is lowered, giving the player bored feeling and it is difficult to improve the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the gaming interests by executing effects using various operation means.

  In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the claims of the present application has a predetermined start area (for example, the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning game formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B). Each of which can be identified based on the establishment of a start condition that permits the start of variable display after the game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through the mouth (eg, determined to be No in step S231). Variable display means (for example, the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B and the image display device 5) for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols and decorative symbols) and deriving and displaying the display results A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be given a predetermined gaming value (for example, a big hit gaming state or a probable variation state) based on a display result of the identification information, the variable Pre-determining means for determining whether or not to give the predetermined game value when the indicated start condition is satisfied (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the process of step S241); Variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S261 to S269) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the prior determination means, and multidirectional instruction operation And a first instruction operation unit (for example, a trigger button 31A) that is provided at a predetermined position of the direction operation unit and allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation. The first operation means (for example, the stick controller 30) and the direction operation unit are provided at a predetermined position separate from the game The first operation means using the first operation means based on the second operation means (for example, push button 31B etc.) composed of the second instruction operation section capable of performing a predetermined instruction operation and the determination result of the variable display pattern determination means. Any operation among an operation effect (for example, operation effect B, operation effect C-1, etc.) and a second operation effect (for example, operation effect A-1, operation effect A-2, etc.) using the second operation means. An effect determining means for determining whether to execute an effect (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes the processes of steps SA03 to SA06), and during execution of the variable display of the identification information, the first operation effect and the Of the second operation effects, effect execution means for executing the operation effect determined by the effect determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the push button in step S558). A reach effect process, a stepped reach reach effect process in step S560, a tilt reach effect process in step S562, a stick use reach effect process in step S564, and the like. Even when the same variable display pattern is determined by the above, it is selectively determined whether to execute the first operation effect or the second operation effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 operates in step SA06. The part determined with reference to the determination table 144 as one of the operation effects A-1, the operation effects A-2, the operation effects B, and the operation effects C-1). The execution of variable display of identification information is not limited to the period from the start of variable display of identification information to the time when the variable display result is derived and displayed. A period until the display of the display result is completed may be included.

  According to such a configuration, the first operation unit includes a direction operation unit that can perform an instruction operation in multiple directions, and a first instruction operation unit that is provided at a predetermined position of the direction operation unit and that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation. A first operation effect using one operation means, or a second operation using a second operation means comprising a second instruction operation unit provided at a predetermined position separate from the direction operation unit and allowing a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation. Among the effects, one of the operation effects determined by the effect determining means is executed by the effect executing means. Execution of performance using such various operation means can improve the game entertainment. Even when the same variable display pattern is determined, any one of the first operation effects and the second operation effects is selectively executed. As a result, it is possible to execute effects using various operation means while preventing an increase in the burden of game control.

  Further, the effect determining means may selectively determine whether to execute the first operation effect or the second operation effect based on a setting by a player (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control). In accordance with the operation item buffer value set in the processing of steps S454 to S458, the portion for determining the operation effect in step SA06).

  In such a configuration, one of the first operation effects and the second operation effect is selectively executed based on the setting by the player. Thereby, according to a player's preference, the production | presentation using a suitable operation means can be performed.

  In addition, an operation history storage unit (for example, a push operation history counter or a trigger operation history counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154) that stores an operation history of the first operation unit and the second operation unit by the player is stored. The effect determining means may selectively determine whether to execute the first operation effect or the second operation effect based on the operation history stored in the operation history storage means. (For example, the portion in which the effect control CPU 120 determines the operation effect in step SA06 according to the operation item buffer value set in the operation item change setting process in step S578).

  In such a configuration, one of the first operation effects and the second operation effect is selectively executed based on the operation history for the first operation means and the second operation means. Thereby, according to a player's preference, the production | presentation using a suitable operation means can be performed.

  Recognizing operation means for performing a predetermined effect operation (for example, an air blow vibration effect or the like) that can be recognized by the player only when an instruction operation is performed on one of the first operation means and the second operation means. (For example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of steps SC33, SC35, SC57, SC59, SC61, SD07, SD09, SD17) and the effect execution means perform the first operation effect and the second operation effect. Among them, when one operation effect using the one operation means is executed, the predetermined effect operation by the recognition operation means is started, while the other operation different from the one operation effect by the effect execution means When an effect is executed, an operation restriction unit (for example, an effect control C) that restricts a predetermined effect operation by the recognition operation unit. After U120 executes the process of step SA08 based on the determination of No in step SA07, the process of steps SC33, SC35, SC57, SC59, SC61, SD07, SD09, and SD17 is executed, while the determination of Yes in step SA07 is performed. Based on the processing of step SC06, SD20, etc.).

  In such a configuration, a predetermined performance operation that can be recognized by the player only when an instruction operation is performed on one of the first operation means and the second operation means is performed, and the first operation is performed. Of the effect and the second operation effect, only when one operation effect using the one operation means is executed, the predetermined effect operation by the recognition operation means is started, while the other operation effect is executed. Sometimes, the predetermined performance operation by the recognition operation means is limited. This can prevent the recognition operation means from operating wastefully.

  The effect execution means can execute a composite operation effect (for example, operation effect C-2) using both the first operation means and the second operation means based on the determination result by the effect determination means ( For example, the production control CPU 120 executes the stick push combined reach production process in step S566), and the production determination unit determines that the predetermined game value is given by the prior determination unit. However, the execution control C 120 may be determined only when the variable display mode is non-probable change (big hit) or positive change (big hit) in the process of step SA06. The operation effect C-2 can be determined by referring to the operation effect determination table 144 in which the determined value is assigned to 2. That).

  In such a configuration, the composite operation effect using both the first operation means and the second operation means can be executed only when the prior decision means determines to give the predetermined game value. By increasing the expectation that the composite operation effect will be executed and promoting the operation by the player, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

  When it is determined that the predetermined game value is to be given by the pre-determining means, before the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed, the fact that the game value has been given is notified. A confirmed effect executing means for executing the confirmed effect to be performed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot confirmed effect control process in step S554), and the confirmed effect executing means is executed by the effect executing means. When an instruction operation is performed by the player in the operation effect, the confirmed effect is executed at a timing related to the instruction operation, and when the instruction operation is not performed by the player, the determined effect is not executed. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the step is based on the determination of Yes in step SB26 or step SB28. Such as the part that performs the processing of up SB29).

  In such a configuration, when an instruction operation is performed by the player in the operation effect, the final effect is executed at a timing related to the instruction operation before the variable information display result of the identification information is derived and displayed. It is possible to improve the fun and entertainment of the game. In addition, when an instruction operation by the player is performed in the operation effect, a confirmed effect is executed. On the other hand, when an instruction operation by the player is not performed, the confirmed effect is not executed. The player's willingness to participate in the operation can be increased.

  The effect execution means may execute the second operation effect in an effect manner similar to the instruction operation on the second instruction operation unit in response to an instruction operation on the first instruction operation unit (for example, in step S558). In the push button use reach effect processing, not only when Yes is determined in Step SC04, but also when Yes is determined in Step SC05, the processing after Step SC09 is executed, and the repeated hits in Step S560 are performed. In the reach effect process, the process of steps SD08 to SD10 is executed not only when the determination of Yes is made in step SD04 but also when the determination of Yes is made in step SD05).

  In such a configuration, even if an instruction operation on the first instruction operation unit is performed instead of an instruction operation on the second instruction operation unit in the second operation effect, the same effect mode is obtained. It is possible to improve the gaming interest by concentrating on the operation of the operation means and promoting the operation by the player.

  The effect execution means may change the effect mode in the second operation effect according to the number of instruction operations on the second instruction operation unit (for example, in the continuous hit reach effect process in step S560, the result of Yes in step SD09). Based on the determination, the achievement effect by the process of step SD10 is executed, and the non-delivery effect by the process of step SD12 is executed based on the determination of Yes in step SD11).

  In such a configuration, the effect mode of the second operation effect changes according to the number of instruction operations performed on the second instruction operation unit provided at a predetermined position separate from the direction operation unit. The game entertainment can be improved by appropriately changing the effect mode in the second operation effect using the second operation means that is easy to (continuously hit) to increase the player's willingness to participate.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a side view which shows the structural example of a stick controller. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for production | presentation counted by the production | presentation control board side. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a prefetch production | presentation type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an alerting | reporting object initial position determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an alerting | reporting object selection pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the prefetch effect determination table at the time of an ending. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of the operation effect determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a jackpot finalization effect determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a notice effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing of a specific pattern common range. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display in an operation item selection effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production setting process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit decision effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a push button use reach production process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display etc. in operation effect A-1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous hit reach production process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display in operation effect A-2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a tilt reach production process. It is a figure showing an example of effect display in operation effect B. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stick use reach production process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the order of a tilt detection period, a push-pull detection period, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display in the operation effect C-1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stick push combined use reach production process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the order, such as a tilt detection period, a push / pull detection period, and a press detection period. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display in the operation effect C-2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an operation item change setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stick use prefetch effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stick use prefetch effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous hit prefetch effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stick push combined use pre-reading effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the order, such as a tilt detection period, a push / pull detection period, and a press detection period. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an ending effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display in a pre-reading effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display in a pre-reading effect.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction, update display by rotation, etc.) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  In the image display device 5, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three areas may be provided so that they can be bonded or separated, or can be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display device 4A is executing variable display of the first special diagram, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to perform effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image showing a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number corresponding to the special figure game (special figure hold memory number) is specified. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the One of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is changed to blue display. Further, when a special ball game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, it is normally not One of the displayed display parts is changed to a red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) is returned to non-display.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number as an effective start winning ball number that has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure game started earlier is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the start condition for starting the figure game is not satisfied, variable display suspension corresponding to the special figure game occurs. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure The number of reserved memories is incremented by 1 (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure The reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented).

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  In addition, in the display area of the image display device 5, special symbols variably displayed in a special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B are separated from the decorative symbols. May be provided with a special symbol variable display area for display as identifiable. As an example, in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the special symbols can be changed in the special symbol variable display area. Variation of the effect image indicating “「 ”or“ x ”corresponding to the display is started. Thereafter, in response to the fact that the special symbol variable display in the special symbol game is terminated and the confirmed special symbol is stopped, “◎” predetermined corresponding to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol variable display area. It is only necessary to stop and display effect images such as “X”. For example, “確定” may be stopped and displayed in the special symbol variable display area when the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is a big hit symbol, and “X” may be stopped and displayed when it is a lost symbol.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 3, and changes into an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the off state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door opens the big winning opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) through a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG.

  Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning device 7 is opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) into the special prize winning opening, and therefore, the second disadvantageous to the player. It becomes a state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 30 that can be held by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). FIG. 2 shows a configuration example of the stick controller 30. The stick controller 30 can be operated in multiple directions by the player holding it and tilting, etc. (for example, four directions including front and rear, left and right, eight directions including slant, and more directions including the middle of these directions) A trigger button 31A is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod 30A (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is placed when the player holds the operation rod 30A). Yes. The trigger button 31A is used for a predetermined instruction operation by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised so that. The operation rod 30A only needs to incorporate a trigger sensor 35A for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button 31A, a vibration motor 34 for vibrating the operation rod 30A, and the like.

  A tilt direction sensor unit 32 that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 30. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit 32 includes two transmissive photosensors arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod 30A when viewed from the player's side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. 4) combining a parallel sensor pair) and two transmission photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod 30A when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the two transmission type photosensors. In addition, the attachment position of the stick controller 30 in a lower plate is not limited to the center part of a lower plate, The position approached to either the right or left may be sufficient.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 30). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35 </ b> B (see FIG. 3) that detects a player's operation act on the push button 31 </ b> B may be provided inside the upper plate body at the position where the push button 31 </ b> B is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the push button 31 </ b> B and the stick controller 30 are attached in the vertical position in the center portion of the upper and lower plates. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of push button 31B and the stick controller 30 as the position which moved to either the right or left in an upper plate and a lower plate, maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 31B and the stick controller 30 is not in a vertical positional relationship, but may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  The trigger button 31A provided on the stick controller 30 is configured such that an instruction operation can be performed by performing a push / pull operation with an operating finger while the player holds the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 with an operating hand. ing. On the other hand, the push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 that forms the upper plate separately from the stick controller 30, and the player does not hold the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30. In FIG. 2, the instruction operation can be performed by pressing the operation hand. Therefore, the trigger button 31A is difficult to perform a continuous hitting operation that is a continuous instruction operation compared to the push button 31B.

  A blower fan 33 for blowing air toward, for example, the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is provided in a predetermined position above the lower plate inside the gaming machine frame 3. For example, when the presentation operation using the stick controller 30 is executed, the blower fan 33 causes the stick controller 30 to vibrate the operation rod 30A by the vibration motor 34 incorporated in the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30. It is only necessary that the air can be blown toward 30 operation rods 30A.

  In the normal game by the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is established due to the above, it is started based on the fact that the first start condition is established, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit gaming state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied due to the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, when the previous special figure game or the big hit game state is ended, the process is started.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result is obtained when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses. A definite special symbol (a special graph display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”. . After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lose symbol. . It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol. In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “5” are 15R jackpot symbols, The special symbol indicating the number “7” is a 16R jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state (15R big hit state) controlled after the 15R big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special winning ball opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is a predetermined period which is the first period. A first variable state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is advantageous to the player by opening the large winning opening in a period until the predetermined number (for example, nine) of winning balls (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, nine) is generated. A round to change to (open state) is executed. In this way, the special prize opening door that has opened the special prize opening during the round is received a special ball, which receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the special prize opening. The device 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. In the 15R big hit state, the number of executions of the round that is the open cycle of the big winning opening is the first round number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15R big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game. In such a 15R big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, “15”) of balls (prize balls) are obtained each time a game ball wins a big winning opening.

  In the big hit gaming state (16R big hit state) controlled after the 16R big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, a round similar to the round in the 15R big hit state is executed. On the other hand, in the case of the 16R big hit state, the number of round executions becomes a second round number (for example, “16”) different from that in the 15R big hit state. Such a game in the 16R big hit state is also referred to as a 16-time open game. In the 16R big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, “15”) of balls (prize balls) are obtained each time a game ball wins a big winning opening.

  Of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “5” that will be the 15R jackpot symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “1” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. After the end, as one of the special gaming states, the time-shortening state (time-shortening control) in which the special symbol variable display time (special-figure variation time) in the special-figure game is shortened compared to the normal state is performed. To be controlled. Here, the normal state is a normal gaming state as a gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, and a short-time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset is performed). In the same manner as in the case where the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. If the time-saving state ends when either of the predetermined number of times (e.g., 70 times) of the special figure game is executed and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15R jackpot symbol that is controlled to the short-time state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is 15R uncertain change. It is called a jackpot symbol (also called “normal jackpot symbol”). In addition, the fact that the 15R non-probable variation big hit symbol out of the 15R big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is referred to as “15R non-probable big hit” (also referred to as “15R normal big hit”).

  Of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “5” that will be the 15R jackpot symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. After the end of the 16R jackpot state after the end of the 16R jackpot state based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “7” which is the 16R jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it is different from the short-time state. As one of the gaming states, for example, control is performed in a probability variation state (high probability state) in which probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed together with time shortening control in which the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the normal state. . In this probabilistic state, the variable display result of each special figure game and decorative design is improved so that the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” and further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. To do. Such a probability change state may continue until the next variable display result is “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the special game. Similar to the time-short state, the time reduction control in the probability variation state may be ended when a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) of the special game is executed. Alternatively, the time reduction control in the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” regardless of the number of executions of the special game.

  Like the special symbol indicating the number “5”, the 15R jackpot symbol that is controlled to the probability change state after the jackpot game state based on the fact that it has been stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is the 15R probability variable bonus symbol. It is called. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 16R big hit symbol controlled to the probable state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a 16R probable big hit symbol. It is called. The fact that the 15R probability variable big hit symbol out of the 15R big hit symbols is stopped and the variable display result is “big hit” is called “15R probability variable big hit”. The fact that the 16R probability variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is called “16R probability variable big hit”. The 15R jackpot symbols “3” and “5” and the 16R jackpot symbol “7” are examples, and each jackpot symbol is not limited to these. For example, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the jackpot symbol or the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol may not be a number but may be a predetermined symbol (for example, “co”).

  Thus, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state and a predetermined number of rounds can be executed, so that the player can easily win a large number of prize balls. The game value advantageous to the player that can be acquired is provided.

  In addition to the time shortening control in the probability variation state and the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to shorten the normal symbol variation time (ordinary symbol variation time) compared to that in the normal state, Control that improves the probability that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal” than in the normal state, the movable wing in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per standard” The game ball easily passes (enters) the second start winning opening, such as control for making the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the piece longer than that in the normal state, and control for increasing the number of times of tilting than in the normal state. Thus, control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the second start condition is satisfied. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that is advantageous for the player by making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening as well as the time shortening control in the probability changing state or the short time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, by performing the high opening control, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and during this period, the time reduction control is performed when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is either the certain change state or the short time state. It may be the same as the period.

  It is also said that the gaming state is in the high base during the high opening control period. On the other hand, when it is not the high opening control period, it is said that the gaming state is in the low base. The time-short state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low probability and high base state, and the normal state is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low probability and low base state. Further, when the high opening control period during which the high opening control is performed in the probability changing state, the gaming state is also referred to as a high probability high base state, and when it is not the high opening control period, it is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It is a gaming state to be played.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are preset. And, when the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (expected degree of big hit) Becomes higher.

  In this embodiment, there are a plurality of super-reach reach effects such as super-reach α and super-reach β, such as an operation effect using the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the trigger button 31A, and an operation effect using the push button 31B. Any one of the types of operation effects can be selectively executed. Further, the reach effect of super reach includes an operation effect using both the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B. Of these plural types of operation effects, which one of the operation effects is to be executed is determined by the player's setting, the history of operation operations (operation history) for the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B, and the variable display result. Is determined at a predetermined rate based on the determination result or the like.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach production, the variable display status of decorative designs may become reach status, and the variable display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Or not is determined.

  In the variable display effect of “sliding”, two or more decorative symbol display areas are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R (for example, “left” and “right”), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), and after changing the decorative symbol again, stop display. Thus, the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. This is the number of times that the decorative symbols re-variate in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As an example, in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a special combination of pseudo-ream chances as shown in FIG. 4 is displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A decorative symbol that is one of a plurality of types of combinations that are predetermined as GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” shown in FIG. 4 or the like is a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation display or changing the decorative symbol again immediately after stopping for a short time. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the decoration design which is not decided. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol may be re-fluctuated after the decorative symbol is stopped to such an extent that the player recognizes that the decorative symbol once displayed is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the variable display result may be set so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of pseudo-continuous changes (re-changes) increases. Accordingly, the player can recognize that the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is performed by temporarily stopping display of any one of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8, and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. Accordingly, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession. Note that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed more than one to three times, for example, four or five times.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a re-change effect such as a related display effect is executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change (pseudo-continuous change). Also good. As an example, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, one that is lit among a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area is 1 It may be controlled to increase one by one. Further, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation), the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs changes. May be controlled. As another example, an effect model (movable member) provided inside or outside the game area is operated during the period of each change display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. It may be controlled. As yet another example, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image during the period of each change display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. May be. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or in place of some or all of these re-change effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of the effect model, display of effect images The re-variation effect may be executed by combining some or all of them. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed multiple times, compared to a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. When the production mode changes, the possibility of super reach reach production, the possibility of the variable display result being “big hit”, the possibility of becoming “15R probability variation big hit” or “16R probability variation big hit”, etc. May be increased.

  The production operation executed as the re-variation production includes a production operation by an arbitrary production object such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and lighting operation of other light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9. It may be a thing. Further, for example, the difference in the output of sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, the difference in motion of the production model (difference in operating speed, difference in operating distance, difference in operating direction, etc.), displayed on the image display device 5 The image mode of the re-variation effect is made different depending on the difference in the movement of the character image (difference in movement speed, difference in movement distance, difference in movement direction, etc.), or the character display instead of the character image is displayed on the image display device 5. It is also possible to change the effect mode in the re-variation effect by changing or changing the display of the background image. Further, in addition to the re-variation effect executed during the variation of the decorative symbol, for example, when the decorative symbol that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped, for example, audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, The player may be able to recognize that the chance eye has been temporarily stopped by an effect operation on an arbitrary effect object such as a lighting operation of an effect lamp 9 or the like.

  In addition to “slip” and “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using the variable display operation of such decorative patterns include, for example, “Development chance eyes”, “Development chance eyes end”, “Slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is reached. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. Expectation is enhanced. Further, in the variable display effect of “end of development chance”, after the decorative display variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped temporarily for the decorative combination (special combination) that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. Unlike the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in which the decorative symbols are changed again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R after being displayed, in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By changing the decorative design again, an effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  During variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach display or variable display effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-run”, for example, displaying a predetermined effect image, displaying a message as an image, outputting sound, etc. As described above, there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol may reach the reach state due to the presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative symbol, the possibility that the reach presentation by the super reach may be executed, the variable A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the display result may be a “hit”. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. May be executed (started) prior to the reach state (before the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. As a specific example, a plurality of types of notice effects such as “character notice” and “operation notice” may be set to be executable. An effect operation that becomes a notice effect may be any action that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time (special figure change time) depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In the notice effect of “Character notice”, an effect display is performed in which a character image prepared in advance at a predetermined position is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during variable display of the decorative symbols. Here, as the display of the character image, a character image that is separate from the decorative design may be displayed statically or in motion (animation display), or a character image that is variably displayed integrally with the decorative design. The display may be an operation display (animation display) in a display form different from the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  In the notice effect of “operation notice”, the player performs an instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 and an instruction operation (push-down operation) on the push button 31B while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. In response to this, for example, the effect operation is changed by changing the display of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5 or changing the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As an example, in the notice effect of “notice at the time of operation”, a predetermined effect action serving as a button operation promotion effect is performed during variable display of a decorative symbol. In the button operation promotion effect, for example, an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, to the trigger button 31 </ b> A or the push button 31 </ b> B by the player. Any directing action that encourages the act of action may be used. The effect operation that prompts the player to perform an operation action is not limited to the effect that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, but that that outputs a predetermined sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. Those that are lit or blinked in a predetermined lighting pattern, those that move a movable member provided in an effect accessory provided inside or outside the game area in a predetermined operation mode, or a combination of these There may be. When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation by the player is set. Then, when an operation to the trigger button 31A or the push button 31B is detected by the trigger sensor 35A or the push sensor 35B within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected. At the same time, for example, any one of the plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance is displayed on the image display device 5, or an effect corresponding to any one of the plurality of types of sound patterns prepared in advance. Various effects such as outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed.

  A big hit that informs that it has been decided that the variable display result will be a “big hit” at a predetermined timing within the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is derived and displayed. A confirmed effect may be executed. As the big hit finalizing effect, for example, a predetermined finalizing notification sound (such as “Pikine” sound effect) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a predetermined position (for example, a gaming machine frame surrounding the gaming area) in the gaming effect lamp 9 3, or a predetermined lamp (for example, a flash lamp) disposed in a predetermined production role) is lit in a predetermined lighting mode (for example, flash lighting), and the image display device 5. Display a predetermined effect image (for example, a character image corresponding to jackpot determination) in a display area of the game, and operate a predetermined effect object provided inside or outside the game area in a predetermined operation mode (for example, rotation) The result of the variable display may be a “big hit” by a predetermined presentation operation including a part or all of them. As long as it can inform the user that was boss.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as reach lose combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. It should be noted that the fixed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative pattern that is a reach combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative pattern of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When the special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is the 15R non-probable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be determined in the special symbol game as the 15R big hit symbol, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is Corresponding to the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a definite decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined non-probable variation big hit combination (also referred to as “normal big hit combination”) is stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbols that are non-probable big hit combinations are, for example, symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination are referred to as non-probable variation symbols (also referred to as “normal symbols”). . Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming the 15R uncertain variable big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach production is executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode is referred to as a “non-probable change” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”, and the big hit type is also “15R non-probable change”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “non-probability change”, the game is controlled to the 15R big hit gaming state, and when the 15R big hit state is finished, the time reduction state is controlled.

  In the special game, the special symbol that shows the number of “5” that is the 15R probability variation big hit symbol out of the special symbol that becomes the 15R big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, or “7” that becomes the 16R big hit symbol When a special symbol indicating a number is stopped and displayed, a reach effect similar to the case where the jackpot type is “15R non-probability” is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being reached. After the event has been executed, or after a reach effect that is different from the case where the big hit type is “15R non-probable change” is executed, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the predetermined probable big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. . Here, the confirmed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination has, for example, a symbol number variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns having the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the 15R probability variable big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the variable probability big hit combination is stopped and displayed. Is included in the variable display mode of “probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The jackpot type in this case is said to be “15R probability variation”. In addition, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming the 16R jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed symbol symbol of the variable variation jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. The mode is also included in the variable display mode of “probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The jackpot type in this case is “16R probability variation”.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a non-probable variation jackpot combination or a certain variation jackpot combination, a re-lottery effect may be executed as a kind of certain variation promotion effect. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are the non-probable big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “ In the left, middle, and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative pattern is changed again, and the decorative pattern (probable variable pattern) that is a combination of the probabilistic big hit and non-variable is displayed. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “15R non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, after the decorative pattern displayed temporarily stopped is re-variable, the non-probable big hit combination is confirmed. A fluctuating promotion failure effect for deriving and displaying decorative symbols is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “15R-probable change” or “16R-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the probabilistic change is made after the decorative symbols displayed temporarily stopped are re-variable. There is a case where a variation promotion success effect that stops and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is executed, or a variation promotion failure effect that is executed during change. Such a re-lottery effect including a changing promotion failure effect and a changing promotion success effect is also referred to as a changing promotion effect.

  After the definitive decorative symbol that is a non-probable jackpot combination is derived and displayed, at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, the next round will start after any round ends in the jackpot gaming state During the big hit that becomes a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probable change state in the period until the start, the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state to the start of the next variable display game, etc. A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”. Such a jackpot promotion effect is also a kind of probable promotion effect.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is no jackpot promotion success effect informing that there is a promotion in which the game state becomes a probabilistic state even though the confirmed decoration pattern is a non-probable big hit combination, and there is no promotion in a promiscuous state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the non-probable variable symbol or the probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol variable display What is necessary is just to alert | report so that a player can recognize the presence or absence of the promotion which will be in a probability change state by displaying the effect image different from.

  In the probability variation state, for example, an effect image for notifying that the probability variation state is “being probability variation” is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the background image or the decorative pattern display mode in the display region of the image display device 5 is displayed. May be different from the display mode in the normal effect mode, for example, so that the player can recognize that the player is in the probability change state. Alternatively, in the probability variation state, for example, the player may be unable to recognize or difficult to recognize that it is in the probability variation state by becoming the same production mode as in the normal state or the short time state (so-called latent probability variation). . It can be said that during the period in which such a latent probability change is performed, the gaming state is in the latent probability change.

  During the round in the big hit gaming state, a pre-reading effect that suggests whether or not the variable display whose variable display result is “big hit” is suspended is executed. As a specific example, in the pre-reading effect, the player's operation on the stick controller 30 (including the operation stick 30A and the trigger button 31A) and the push button 31B is detected during execution of a predetermined round (for example, the fifth round). An effect image suggesting a variable display result is displayed based on the fact. At this time, the numerical data indicating the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used as the specific pattern common range when the variable display whose variable display result is “big hit” is suspended or when the variable display result is “losing”. When execution of variable display within a predetermined range is suspended, for example, the first effect image of a plurality of types of effect images is displayed at a higher rate than the second effect image. Just do it. Here, the first effect image and the second effect image need only have different colors, for example. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing” and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 is outside the range of the specific pattern common range, the execution of the variable display is suspended. What is necessary is just to display at a higher rate than an effect image. Thereby, execution of variable display in which the variable display result is “big hit” is suspended depending on which effect image is displayed among a plurality of types of effect images including the first effect image and the second effect image. You can have different expectations.

  Further, at the end of the big hit gaming state, it is only necessary to indicate whether or not the variable display whose variable display result is “big hit” is suspended depending on whether or not the ending pre-reading effect is executed. As a specific example, in the pre-reading effect at the ending, an effect image that suggests a variable display result may be displayed together with an effect image that notifies the end of the big hit gaming state. At this time, the numerical data indicating the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used as the specific pattern common range when the variable display whose variable display result is “big hit” is suspended or when the variable display result is “losing”. When execution of variable display that falls within a predetermined range is suspended, a higher ratio than the execution ratio of the normal ending effect at the time of the ending ending effect is different from the ending prefetch effect Thus, the pre-reading effect at the ending may be executed. Alternatively, when execution of variable display in which the variable display result is “big hit” is suspended, or even when the variable display result is “losing”, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is preliminarily set as the specific pattern common range. When execution of variable display within the predetermined range is suspended, the numerical data indicating the random display value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when the variable display result is “losing” is in the specific pattern common range. The pre-reading effect at the time of ending may be executed at a higher rate than when only execution of variable display that is out of range is suspended. For the ending pre-reading effect and the ending normal effect, the effect mode (effect contents) may be different, for example, by changing the color of the effect image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Thus, at the end of the big hit gaming state, depending on whether the pre-reading effect at the ending or the normal effect at the ending was executed, the expectation that the variable display with the variable display result of “big hit” is suspended Can be different.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electrical parts for production such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 5A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second variation start commands and the variation pattern designation command are prepared as separate production control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, the result of prior determination as to whether the variable display result will be “lost” or “big hit”, and the variable display result will be “big hit”. Corresponding to the big hit type determination result of 15R non-probable big hit with "15R non-probable change", 15R probable big hit with "15R probable change", or 16R probable big hit with "16R probable change" Different EXT data is set. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R uncertain change”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability change”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “16R probability change”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated in the variable display result notification command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, an effect control command for setting EXT data corresponding to a combination of a fluctuation pattern and a variable display result (either “losing” or “big hit” and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”) is prepared. Then, information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to whether the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time-short state. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is a normal state, and the command 9501H is a highly accurate and high-speed control in which the gaming state is a probabilistic state and time-shortening control or high opening control is performed. The second gaming state designation command corresponding to the state, and the command 9502H is the third gaming state designation command corresponding to the high probability low base state (latency probability changing) in which the gaming state is the probability changing state and the time-shortening control or the high opening control is not performed. The command 9503H may be a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the short-time state.

  In this embodiment, a decoration symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command for designating stop of variable display of the decoration symbol. On the other hand, the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted. In this case, on the side of the production control board 12, the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is specified, and the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. When the elapsed time reaches the specified special figure variation time, a setting for ending the effect executed corresponding to the special game is performed without receiving an effect control command from the main board 11. You can make it.

  The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determined result. Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermination result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a large winning opening being notified command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the big winning opening is opened to notify that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. In the big prize opening notification command or the big prize opening notification command, different EXT data is set corresponding to, for example, the number of rounds executed in the 15R big hit state or 16R big hit state (for example, “1” to “16”). Is done. In the jackpot gaming state, regardless of whether the jackpot is in the open state or whether the jackpot is changed from the open state to the closed state, from the start of the jackpot gaming state, Or you may make it perform a continuous production | presentation operation | movement from the time of the variable display start of a decorative design to the time of the end of a big hit game state. Or, in the big hit gaming state, it is a period in which the grand prize opening is in an open state, a period in which the big prize opening is changed from an open state to a closed state, or the number of times that the big prize opening is in an open state Different rendering operations may be executed according to (the number of rounds executed).

  The command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command or the jackpot start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the jackpot end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined determination result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the jackpot start designation command. .

  The command B1XXH is a first special symbol display based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning is generated. This is a first start slot winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the device 4A is established. The command B2XXH is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning has occurred, and the second special symbol is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the display device 4B is established.

  In this embodiment, the first start opening winning designation command notifies a determination result using predetermined numerical data at the time of the first start winning that is the time of detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening. It is also used as an effect control command. The second start opening prize designation command is an effect control command for notifying a determination result using predetermined numerical data at the time of the second start winning place, which is a time of detecting a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening. Also used as

  For example, as shown in FIG. 5C, in the first start opening prize designation command and the second start opening prize designation command, a predetermined determination numerical value (used for determining whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” ( For example, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the variable display result corresponding to the “big hit” (for example, the special figure display result of the “big hit” in the special figure display result determination table 130). Different EXT data is set according to whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the assigned decision value). More specifically, the commands B100H and B101H and the commands B200H and B201H notify that the determination that the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” has not been made, while the commands B102H and B202H are variable. When it is determined that the display result is determined to be “big hit”, the “big win determination at winning” is notified.

  Further, in the first start opening prize designation command and the second start opening prize designation command, when the variable display result is “losing”, a predetermined variable display determining numerical value (for example, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is set). Whether or not it is determined to be a specific variation pattern based on a determination value (for example, a determination value included in a specific pattern common range) corresponding to a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern with super reach). Different EXT data is set in accordance with. More specifically, the command B100H and the command B200H indicate “outside the specific pattern common range” when it is not determined that the random value MR3 is outside the specific pattern common range and determined to be the specific variation pattern. On the other hand, the command B101H and the command B201H notify “within a specific pattern common range” when it is determined that the random value MR3 is within the specific pattern common range and determined to be the specific variation pattern. .

  The command C0XXH displays the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 in an identifiable manner. This is a special figure reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number which is the total value with the reserved memory number. The special figure hold memory number notification command is executed when, for example, either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or the special start game is executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Corresponding to the start or the like, following the transmission of either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command, the main board 11 sends it to the effect control board 12. The In the special figure hold storage number notification command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of hold data (for example, “0” to “8”) in the special figure hold storage unit 151A shown in FIG. As a result, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special game is executed. Is received, the special figure pending storage number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the total number of pending data stored in the special figure pending storage unit 151A (the total pending storage number of variable display) is calculated. Can be identified.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may include at least the RAM 103 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101 may be external or internal. Further, the random number circuit 104 and the I / O 105 may be externally attached.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform the game control. Specifically, this means that the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 11.

  On the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses the random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR5 is updated by the CPU 103 using the random counter. It may be updated by software using Also, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104, numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is obtained. It may be updated.

  The game control microcomputer 100 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 101 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 100). The numerical data obtained by the setting is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 104 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is any one of “15R uncertain change”, “15R positive change”, “15R positive change”, which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”. Random number values used for determining the value, for example, take values in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used to determine the variation pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, “1”. A value in the range of “251” is taken. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. For example, “1” to “ It takes a value in the range of “997”. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”. That is, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal game display result is a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result in the normal game ( This is used to determine whether or not to change from a normal open state to a state where the game ball easily passes (enters) (expanded open state).

  FIG. 7 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is “non-probability change” or “probability change” among the cases where the display result is “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 are prepared in advance as non-reach variation patterns. Further, as the reach variation pattern, variation pattern PA2-1, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PB2-1, variation pattern PB2-2, variation pattern PA3-1, variation pattern PA3-2, variation pattern PB3-1, variation A pattern PB3-2 is prepared in advance. As the hit fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, fluctuation pattern PA4-2, fluctuation pattern PB4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, fluctuation pattern PA5-1, fluctuation A pattern PA5-2, a fluctuation pattern PB5-1, and a fluctuation pattern PB5-2 are prepared in advance.

  FIG. 8 shows the variation pattern type in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 7 is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, an effect operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols. As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of a decorative design does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns according to the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach What is necessary is just to divide into the fluctuation pattern classification in which the pattern is included, and the fluctuation pattern classification in which the fluctuation pattern with a super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is included. As another example, categorizing (grouping) multiple variation patterns according to the presence or absence of “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) to execute “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects A variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that is not included, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is 1 in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, and “pseudo-continuous” What is necessary is just to divide into the variation pattern classification in which the variation pattern which makes the frequency | count of execution of a pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) 2 or more is included in the variable display effect of this. As yet another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the presence or absence of variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip”, or the variable display time of decorative symbols. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 8, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 are prepared in advance in response to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Yes. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach”, the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 are prepared in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA1-1 is a variation pattern type of “no shortening” in which the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened and variable display effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “slip” are not executed. The variation pattern PA1-1 associated in advance is included. The variation pattern type CA1-2 is a variation pattern type of “with shortening” in which variable display effects such as “pseudo ream” and “slip” are not executed because the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened. The associated variation pattern PA1-2 is included. The variation pattern type CA1-3 is a variation pattern type of “sliding, pseudo-continuous” in which a variable display effect of “pseudo-run” or “slip” is executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach”. The associated variation patterns PA1-3 and variation patterns PA1-4 are included.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is when the reach effect is ended with the normal reach that becomes the normal reach effect after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state without executing the variable display effect of the “pseudo-ream”. Is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (losing) pseudo-relation” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of a reach combination, and includes a variation pattern PA2-1 and a variation pattern PA2-2 that are associated in advance. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, followed by normal reach, and when the reach effect ends, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination is displayed. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (lost) pseudo-relation” and includes a variation pattern PB2-1 and a variation pattern PB2-2 that are associated in advance. The variation pattern type CA2-3 is a super-reach (super-reach α or super-reach β) after the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach state regardless of whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Is a variation pattern type of “super reach (losing)” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of a reach combination when the reach production ends, and a variation pattern PA3-1 and variation pattern PA3-2 associated in advance , Fluctuation pattern PB3-1 and fluctuation pattern PB3-2.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, but the normal display is performed after the variable symbol display state of the decorative pattern is set to the reach state, and when the reach effect ends, the definite decoration of the jackpot combination is determined. It is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (big hit) pseudo-relation” for deriving and displaying symbols, and includes a variation pattern PA4-1 and a variation pattern PA4-2 that are associated in advance. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the normal reach is involved. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit) pseudo-relation” and includes a variation pattern PB4-1 and a variation pattern PB4-2 that are associated in advance. The variation pattern type CA3-3 is used when the reach effect ends with the super reach after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state regardless of whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Is a variation pattern type of “super reach” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative combination of jackpot combination, and previously associated variation pattern PA5-1, variation pattern PA5-2, variation pattern PB5-1, variation pattern PB5-2 is included.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 130 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 130 is displayed when the first start condition for allowing the start of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, or in the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition that allows the start of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special figure display result) of the special symbol is derived and displayed, It is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result as “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  In the special figure display result determination table 130, a numerical value (to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probabilistic state. (Determined value) is assigned to one of the special figure display results of “big hit” and “losing”. In this embodiment, whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. Regardless, the special figure display result is determined with reference to the same special figure display result determination table 130. On the other hand, each of the case of the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the case of the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Correspondingly, determination tables with different allocations of determination values for special figure display results may be prepared.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines that the jackpot type is “15R” based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled (predetermined). This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “non-probability change”, “15R probability change”, and “16R probability change”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is assigned to the jackpot type such as “15R non-probable change”, “15R probability change”, “16R probability change”, and the like. .

  In the big hit type determination table 131, the table data indicating the decision values assigned to a plurality of types of big hit types is the result of determining whether to control to the 15R big hit state or 16R big hit state, and after the end of the big hit gaming state This is data for determination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to control the gaming state to the certain change state. For example, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the jackpot type of “15R non-probable change” or “15R probability change” corresponds to the decision result of controlling to the 15R jackpot state, while the jackpot type of “16R probability change” The table data indicating the decision value assigned to the table corresponds to the decision result that the 16R big hit state is controlled. Further, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “15R non-probable” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result that the control is not performed in the probability change state, while the “15R probability change” or “16R probability change” jackpot type. The table data indicating the determined value assigned to indicates the determination result that the control is performed in the probability variation state. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, any one of “0” to “2”). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  In this embodiment, by referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10 and determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types, the execution mode of the round in the jackpot gaming state (the number of executions and the opening of the big prize opening) Time etc.) and whether or not to control to the probability variation state are determined collectively. In addition, these are not limited to what is determined collectively, You may make it each determine separately. For example, after determining the jackpot gaming state to be either the 15R jackpot state or the 16R jackpot state based on numerical data indicating a random number value for round determination, etc., a numerical value indicating the determination result or a random value for determining the probability variation control It may be determined whether or not to control the probability variation state based on data or the like. Then, when the big hit gaming state is determined to be the 16R big hit state, the decision to control to the probability change state may always be made. On the other hand, when the big hit gaming state is determined to be the 15R big hit state, whether or not to control the probability variation state may be determined according to numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability variation control. Thus, instead of the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the round and the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the probability variation control may be used. .

  Either or both of the execution mode of the round in the big hit gaming state (the number of executions, the opening time of the big prize opening, etc.) and whether or not to control the probability variation state, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It may be determined based on the numerical data shown. For example, in the special figure display result determination table 130, when the special figure display result of “big hit” is obtained, the decision value is determined for the determination result of whether the big hit gaming state is the 15R big hit state or the 16R big hit state. It may be assigned. Alternatively, in the special figure display result determination table 130, when a special figure display result of “big hit” is obtained, a decision value is assigned to the decision result of “non-probable variable big hit” or “probable big hit”. It may be done. Alternatively, in the special figure display result determination table 130, when the special figure display result of “big hit” is obtained, the decision values are assigned to a plurality of types of big hit types, and the big hit type is determined using only the random value MR1. It may be determined.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern type determination table, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal use) 132B shown in FIG. A loss variation pattern type determination table (short and medium) 132C shown in FIG. 11 (C) is prepared in advance.

  The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, a comparison with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is made according to whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “15R uncertain change”, “15R probability change”, or “16R probability change”. The numerical value (determined value) to be assigned is assigned to one of the fluctuation pattern type CA3-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA3-3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. There is a part. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “15R uncertain change”, “15R probability change”, or “16R probability change”, the decision values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3. Is different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be varied according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types.

  Depending on which of the multiple types of jackpot types has been determined, there may be portions where determined values are assigned to different variation pattern types. For example, when the big hit type is “16R probability variation”, the determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type different from the case where the big hit type is “15R non-probability variation” or “15R probability variation”. . In this setting, when the big hit type becomes the 16R big hit state according to “16R probability change”, it is determined that the variation pattern type is different from the case of being controlled to the 15R big hit state. Reach production can be executed.

  In addition, when the big hit type is determined as “15R non-probability change”, “15R probability change”, or “16R probability change”, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of a normal state, a probability change state, and a short-time state. Depending on the above, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. In addition, when the big hit type is determined as “15R non-probability change”, “15R probability change”, or “16R probability change”, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of a normal state, a probability change state, and a short-time state. Accordingly, the determined values may be assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  When the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 132C are determined (predetermined) to set the special figure display result to “lost”, the variation pattern type is determined. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Here, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B is selected as a use table when the gaming state is the normal state, for example. On the other hand, the loss variation pattern type determination table (medium time reduction) 132C is selected as a use table when time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed in a time reduction state or a probability change state, for example. When the time-shortening control is not performed in the probability variation state, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B may be selected as the usage table.

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (during short time) 132C, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined according to the number of special figure hold memories as the total hold memory number. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared is assigned to any one of the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-3 and the variation pattern type CA2-1 to variation pattern type CA2-3. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 132C, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types so that the ratios determined for the variation pattern types are different from each other. There is a part that. Thereby, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be made different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the short time state, or the probability variation state. It should be noted that in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (medium time) 132C, there may be portions where determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the time-short state, or the probability variation state.

  In this embodiment, by referring to either the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B or the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 132C, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to the variation pattern type CA1- 3 or a variation pattern type CA2-1 to a variation pattern type CA2-3. Here, as shown in FIG. 7, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. It is. Further, the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern type based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type with reference to the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time medium) 132C, It is possible to determine whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state.

  FIG. 12 shows a configuration example of the variation pattern determination table 133 stored in the ROM 101. The variation pattern determination table 133 is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the variation pattern determination random value MR4 in accordance with the variation pattern type determination result. In the variation pattern determination table 133, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to one or a plurality of variation patterns according to the variation pattern type.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 13 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 13 includes a special figure hold storage unit 151A, a general figure hold storage unit 151B, a game control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, and a game control counter setting unit. 154 and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

  The special figure storage unit 151A has a first start condition that is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a start winning is generated. Is a game ball for holding data of a special figure game that has not been established (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The second start condition is satisfied by passing (entering) and a start winning is generated, but the second start condition is not satisfied (the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is used) Hold data of special figure game) is stored. As an example, the special figure holding storage unit 151A associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port, and passes the game ball through (entry). The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the disturbance for determining the variation pattern type, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR3 or the like is stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “8”). Note that a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is set in advance for each of the number of stored data based on winning at the first start winning opening and the number of stored data based on winning at the second starting winning opening. It only has to be defined.

  Further, in this embodiment, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port is also included in the hold data, and is associated with the hold number. It is stored in the figure holding storage unit 151A. As an example, the special figure reservation storage unit 151A receives “first” start opening data indicating a winning at the first starting winning opening or “second” starting opening data indicating a winning at the second starting winning opening. The game balls are stored in association with the hold numbers according to the winning order of each game ball.

  Note that the hold data based on the establishment of the first start condition by passing (entering) the game ball through the first start winning opening and the second start condition by passing (entering) the game ball through the second start winning opening. The hold data based on the establishment of may be stored in association with the hold number in a separate hold storage unit. In this case, a starting port data storage unit is provided for storing the starting port data in association with the holding number according to the winning order of each game ball, and the starting condition is established for the special game corresponding to each holding data. What is necessary is just to make it possible to specify the order.

  The usual figure holding storage unit 151B stores the holding information of the usual figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common figure hold storage unit 151B associates the hold numbers with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate 41, and determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR5 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In the step S15 of FIG. 21 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 22, which process is to be selected and executed is instructed. The ordinary symbol process flag indicates which process should be selected and executed in the ordinary symbol process shown in step S16 of FIG. 21 in order to control the progress of the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol indicator 20. Instruct.

  The big hit flag is set to an on state in response to a determination (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off in response to the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becoming the time reduction state or the probability change state and the time reduction control is started, while the time reduction control in the time reduction state or the probability change state is performed. Cleared in response to termination, etc., and turned off.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a variable symbol display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game. . As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the universal diagram game such as a variable symbol display time (ordinary variation time) of the normal symbol in the ordinary game. . As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting a count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 includes a random counter, a first start winning determination counter, a second start winning determination counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, and a total reserved memory number counter. , A short time counter, a round counter and the like are provided.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 is a numerical value extracted from the random number circuit 104 or a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104. This is for the CPU 103 to count the data so that it can be updated by software. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as a random count value. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The first start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the first start port switch 22A is ON. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal from the first start port switch 22A is ON, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is incremented by one. When the stored value in the first start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, the game ball that has normally entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected. Judgment is made. In addition, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is cleared when it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal is OFF or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The second start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 22B is ON. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal from the second start port switch 22B is ON, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is incremented by one. When the stored value in the second start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally detected. Is made. Further, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is cleared when it is determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal is OFF, or when it is determined that the winning determination value is reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first special figure reserved memory number which is the number of reserved data corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first special figure reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and corresponding to the increase or decrease of the first special figure reserved memory number Updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second special figure reserved memory number which is the number of reserved data corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second special figure reserved memory number is stored as a second reserved memory number count value, corresponding to the increase or decrease of the second special figure reserved memory number. Updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The time reduction counter is used to count the number of remaining special-purpose games that can be executed until the time reduction control is ended when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the time reduction state. As an example, when the jackpot gaming state ends, data indicating the count initial value “70” corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value being “0” is set as the hourly count count value in the hourly number counter. . Thereafter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the time count count value is decremented by 1 every time the special figure game ends. Then, when the time reduction count value reaches “0”, the time reduction flag is cleared and turned off, for example, to control to end the time reduction state and shift to the normal state. It should be noted that the time reduction control may be terminated when the number of executions of the special figure game has reached a predetermined number even in the probability variation state. In this case, regardless of the big hit type buffer value, when the big hit gaming state is finished, after the count initial value is set in the hourly number counter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the special game is Every time it is completed, the time count count value may be updated by subtracting 1 or the like. Then, when the time reduction count value reaches “0”, the time reduction control may be terminated by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off.

  The round number counter is for counting the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round game is finished and the next round game is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a start port buffer, a variation special figure designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The starting port buffer stores a buffer value indicating whether a game ball that has entered the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port is detected. As an example, “1” is set in the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of a game ball that has entered the first start winning port by the first start port switch 22A. Further, “2” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning port by the second start port switch 22B.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Further, in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, “2” is set to the variable special figure designation buffer value. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type is one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 10, if the jackpot type is “15R non-probable change”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0” and the jackpot type is set to “15R probable change”. ”Is set to“ 1 ”for the jackpot type buffer value, and“ 2 ”is set to the jackpot type buffer value if the jackpot type is“ 16R probability variation ”.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. Alternatively, while the production control CPU 120 is built in the production control microcomputer, at least one of the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 may be externally attached to the production control microcomputer. The random number circuit 124 may be any one that is built in or externally attached to the production control microcomputer. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, A wiring for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14.

  Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's instruction operation (push-pull operation) with respect to the trigger button 31A has been detected from the trigger sensor 35A, or push Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's instruction operation (pressing operation) for the button 31B has been detected, and the player's instruction operation for the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 A wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that (tilt operation) has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 32 is also connected. In addition, the effect control board 12 is connected to wiring for transmitting a drive control signal to the blower fan 33, wiring for transmitting a drive control signal to the vibration motor 34, and the like.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. FIG. 14 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 14, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, a random value SR1 for determining the prefetch effect type, a random value SR2 for determining the initial position for notification, Random value SR3, Random value SR4 for determining prefetching at the time of ending, Random value SR5-1 for determining operation effect, Random value SR5-2 for determining initial position to be operated, Random value SR6 for determining jackpot determined effect, notice Numerical data indicating each of the random number SR7 for effect determination is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the final stop symbol used for determining a final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result of the decorative symbol may be controlled to be countable.

  The random value SR1 for determining the pre-reading effect type determines whether or not to perform the effect operation that becomes the pre-reading effect, and when it is determined to execute, the pre-reading effect type is one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. A random value used to determine. As an example, the random number SR1 for determining the prefetch effect type takes a value in the range of “1” to “400”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the initial position of the notification target randomly determines the initial position of the notification target when the notification target can be selected by operating the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 in the pre-reading effect. It is a random value used for As an example, the random number SR2 for determining the notification target initial position takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”.

  The random value SR3 for determining the notification target selection pattern indicates a notification target selection procedure according to the number of operations when the notification target can be selected according to the number of operations of the push button 31B or the like in the pre-reading effect. It is a random value used to determine the notification target selection pattern as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. As an example, the random number SR3 for determining the notification target selection pattern takes a value in the range of “1” to “300”.

  The ending prefetch determination random value SR4 is used to determine whether or not to execute an ending prefetch effect based on variable display hold data as an ending effect executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. It is a random value. As an example, the random value SR4 for prefetch determination at the time of ending takes a value in the range of “1” to “150”.

  The random number SR5-1 for determining the operation effect is used to determine the effect mode (effect content) as one of a plurality of modes prepared in advance when the operation effect is executed as the reach effect of super reach. It is a random value. As an example, the random number SR5-1 for determining the operation effect takes a value in the range of “1” to “201”.

  The random number SR5-2 for determining the operation target initial position is used to randomly select the initial position of the operation target when operating the effect part to be operated by operating the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 in the operation effect. It is a random value used to determine As an example, the random number value SR5-2 for determining the operation target initial position takes a value in the range of “1” to “297”.

  The random value SR6 for determining the jackpot finalizing effect is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the rendering operation as the jackpot finalizing effect, and for determining the execution timing of the rendering when it is determined to be performed. is there. As an example, the random value SR6 for determining the big hit finalizing effect takes a value in the range of “1” to “401”.

  The random number SR7 for determining the notice effect determines whether or not to perform the effect operation as the notice effect, and determines the effect mode (effect contents) when it is determined to be executed as one of a plurality of modes prepared in advance. It is a random value used to As an example, the random number SR7 for determining the notice effect takes a value in the range of “1” to “501”.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination table, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decoration LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, an effect control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation and various effect control patterns.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. It is composed of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as a variable display operation of decorative symbols, an effect display operation in a reach effect, or various effect display operations not accompanied by a variable display of decorative symbols. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 15A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 15A, the effect control pattern is derived from process data including, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, an end code, and the like. It is configured.

  The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the effect control process timer value that is a stored value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 shown in FIG. Thus, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter.

  The operation detection control data includes, for example, an operation effective period for effectively detecting an instruction operation (tilting operation) for the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and an instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A, or an instruction for the push button 31B. An effect operation mode corresponding to a player's operation action, such as an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation (pressing operation) and data for designating control contents of the effect operation when each operation is detected effectively, is shown. Contains data. In the operation detection control data, for example, when an effect operation using the stick controller 30 is executed, an effect of driving the vibration motor 34 built in the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 to vibrate the operation rod 30A. Data specifying operation control content and the like, and data specifying operation control content and the like of the staging operation that drives the blower fan 33 toward the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 may be included. Here, for example, an operation operation of the stick controller 30 includes an effect operation that vibrates the operating rod 30A by driving the vibration motor 34 and an effect operation that blows air toward the operation rod 30A by driving the blower fan 33. Operation detection control data or the like may be set so as to be started in response to the fact that a predetermined operation action such as detection of an instruction operation (tilting operation) on 30A is detected effectively. Alternatively, the blowing vibration effect is started, for example, when an operation effect using the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 or the trigger button 31A is executed, while the operation is restricted when an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed ( Operation detection control data or the like may be set so as to be prohibited.

  The blowing vibration effect is performed as a predetermined effect operation that can be recognized by the player only when an instruction operation is performed on one of the operation means such as the stick controller 30 of the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B. It should be noted that the predetermined effect operation that can be recognized by the player only when performing an instruction operation on any one of the plurality of operation means is not limited to the air blow vibration effect, for example, the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30. It may be an arbitrary performance operation such as a performance operation that can be recognized only when the player touches the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 by cooling or heating the inside. Further, instead of the blow vibration effect for the stick controller 30, a blow vibration effect for the push button 31B may be executed. That is, a predetermined effect operation that can be recognized by the player only when an instruction operation is performed on one of the operation means of the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B, and an operation effect using the one operation means is performed. As long as the predetermined effect operation is started, the predetermined effect operation may be limited when the operation effect using the other operation means different from that is executed.

  Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern configured to include a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data configured to include all of the display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data, or process data configured to include a part of these. Furthermore, other various control data such as, for example, production model control data indicating an operation mode in the movable member included in the production model may be included.

  FIG. 15B shows various rendering operations executed according to the content of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control is performed to flash a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp control data. In the operation valid period specified by the detection control data, the operation of the trigger button 31A, the push button 31B of the stick controller 30 or the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is accepted to determine the production contents, the driving of the blower fan 33 and the vibration motor The control of determining the production content by the drive 34 is performed. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. Thus, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamps) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the light emitters 9 and the like, the blower fan 33, the vibration motor 34, and the like is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 16A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, or the like The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, a winning determination result buffer 200 as shown in FIG. 16B is provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. In the winning determination result buffer 200, the contents of notification by the first starting opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 are stored. As an example, the determination result buffer 200 at the time of winning is associated with the storage number in the order of receiving the first start opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command (game ball detection order), and “outside the specific pattern common range” ”,“ Within a specific pattern common range ”,“ determined per winning time ”, starting port information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port, etc. Is stored as on-hold storage information.

  FIG. 17 shows a configuration example of the prefetch effect type determination table 140 stored in the ROM 121. The pre-reading effect type determination table 140 shown in FIG. 17A determines whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect based on variable display hold data, and the contents of the pre-reading effect when it is executed (effect mode) ) Is a table that is referred to in order to determine a pre-reading effect type corresponding to one of a plurality of types. In the pre-reading effect type determination table 140, it is compared with the random value SR1 for determining the pre-reading effect type according to the result of checking the stored contents of the winning determination result buffer 200 (the result of checking the winning determination result buffer storage contents). A numerical value (determined value) is assigned to either no pre-reading effect that does not execute the pre-reading effect, or one of the pre-reading effect type CS1 to the pre-reading effect type CS3. As a result of checking the contents of the winning determination result buffer storage, there is a determination result of “There is a determination per winning time” including the holding storage information indicating the determination per winning time, and there is no holding storage information indicating the determination per winning time, and a common pattern is common. A determination result of “within specific pattern common range” that includes reserved storage information indicating the range, and a determination result of “other than the above” indicating other cases (such as when all the stored storage information indicates outside the specific pattern common range) There is.

  FIG. 17B shows the content of the effect in the prefetch effect according to each prefetch effect type determined using the prefetch effect type determination table 140 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1, an effect operation using the stick controller 30 (including the operation stick 30A and the trigger button 31A) is executed. In the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2, using the push button 31B, an effect operation in which the effect mode (effect content) changes according to the continuous operation (continuous hitting operation) is executed. In the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS3, an effect operation that uses both the stick controller 30 (including the operation stick 30A and the trigger button 31A) and the push button 31B is executed.

  In the setting example of the pre-reading effect type determination table 140 shown in FIG. 17A, the determination value is assigned so that the determination ratio of each pre-reading effect type differs depending on the result of checking the winning determination result buffer storage content. There is a part that. For example, when the winning determination result buffer storage content check result is “There is determination per winning time”, more determination values are assigned to the pre-reading effect type CS1 than in the case of other check results. On the other hand, when the winning determination result buffer storage content check result is “determination per winning time”, the decision value assigned to the pre-reading effect type CS2 is smaller than in the case of other check results. Yes. Therefore, when an effect operation serving as the first operation effect using the stick controller 30 is executed as the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS1, the push button 31B is used as the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS2. There is a higher possibility that the on-hold storage information indicating the winning time determination is stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 as compared to when the rendering operation as the second operation effect is executed. Thereby, when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 using the stick controller 30 is executed, the big hit game is compared with when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2 using the push button 31B is executed. The display result of the variable display that has been put on hold after the end of the state becomes “big hit”, and the sense of expectation that the big hit gaming state is once again increased.

  In the setting example of the pre-reading effect type determination table 140 shown in FIG. 17A, there is a part in which the determination value is assigned to a different pre-reading effect type according to the winning determination result buffer storage content check result. For example, the determined value is assigned to the pre-reading effect type CS3 only when the winning determination result buffer storage content check result is “There is a determination per winning time”. Therefore, when a presentation operation that is a combined operation presentation using both the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B is executed as a pre-reading stage of the pre-reading stage type CS3, the stored storage information indicating the winning time determination is stored at the time of winning. It is determined that it is stored in the determination result buffer 200. Thereby, when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS3 using both the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B is executed, the display result in the variable display held after the end of the big hit gaming state is “big hit”. Then, it is definitely notified that the game state will be the big hit game state again.

  FIG. 18 shows a configuration example of the notification target initial position determination table 141 stored in the ROM 121. The notification target initial position determination table 141 is a notification target to be notified of the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” when the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS1 or the prefetch effect type CS3 is executed. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine the initial position based on the random value SR2 for determining the initial position of the notification target. Here, the notification target of the possibility that the variable display result may be “big hit” is that the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied when the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. However, what is necessary is just to be selected from the variable displays that are still held without the first start condition and the second start condition being satisfied. The initial position of the notification target is a variable display that is initially selected as the notification target when the pre-reading effect type CS1 or the pre-reading effect type CS3 is started, and is stored in the winning determination result buffer 200. What is necessary is just to be able to specify by the storage number matched with the determined determination result. In the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 or the pre-reading effect type CS3, the selection of the variable display to be notified is changed according to the player's instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30. I can do it.

  In the notification target initial position determination table 141, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value SR2 for determining the notification target initial position is assigned to the notification target initial storage number according to the determination result storage number maximum value. . The determination result storage number maximum value indicates the maximum value of the storage number associated with the effective determination result (determination result corresponding to the suspended variable display) stored in the winning determination buffer 200. That is, the determination result storage number maximum value may be the same value as the total number of reserved storage. The notification target initial storage number indicates the storage number of the determination result corresponding to the variable display that is the initial position of the notification target. In the notification target initial position determination table 141, a determination value is assigned to a notification target initial storage number that is equal to or less than the determination result storage number maximum value. By determining the notification target initial storage number using such a notification target initial position determination table 141, it is possible to determine the variable display that is the initial position of the notification target to be varied at a predetermined rate.

  FIG. 19 shows a configuration example of the notification target selection pattern determination table 142 stored in the ROM 121. In the notification target selection pattern determination table 142 shown in FIG. 19A, the notification target selection pattern used when the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS2 is executed is set as a random value SR3 for determining the notification target selection pattern. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of patterns. In the notification target selection pattern determination table 142, the information stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 is compared with the random number SR3 for determining the notification target selection pattern according to the result of checking the storage content of the determination result buffer 200 (the determination result buffer storage content check result at the time of winning). Are assigned to a plurality of notification target selection patterns.

  FIG. 19B shows a setting example of each notification target selection pattern determined using the notification target selection pattern determination table 142 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2, the number of times (number of operations) of detecting a player's continuous instruction operation (pressing operation as a continuous hitting operation) on the push button 31B is notified. When the notification execution determination value determined for each is reached, an effect operation for notifying the possibility of a “hit” on the variable display that is the notification target is executed. The notification target selection pattern defines a notification execution determination value for each notification target storage number. The notification target storage number indicates the storage number in the winning determination buffer 200 of the determination result corresponding to the variable display to be notified. In this embodiment, when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2 is started, the notification target storage number is set to “1”, the number of operations reaches the notification execution determination value, and the variable display becomes the notification target. After the possibility of becoming a “big hit” is notified at 1, the notification target storage number is incremented by 1 to change the notification target selection.

  In the setting example of the notification target selection pattern determination table 142 shown in FIG. 19A, the determination value is assigned so that the determination ratio of each notification target selection pattern differs according to the winning determination result buffer storage content check result. There is a part. For example, when the winning determination result buffer storage content check result is “There is a determination per winning time” or “within a specific pattern common range”, only the reserved storage information indicating the outside of the specific pattern common range is displayed. More determination values are assigned to the notification target selection pattern HSP2 than in the case of “other than”. On the other hand, when the winning determination result buffer storage content check result is “There is determination per winning time” or “within a specific pattern common range”, the determination value assigned to the notification target selection pattern HSP1 is “ It is less than “other than the above”. As shown in FIG. 19B, in the notification target selection pattern HSP1, the notification execution determination value when the notification target storage numbers are “1” to “3” is larger than that in the notification target selection pattern HSP2. It is stipulated in. Therefore, when the stored storage information indicating the winning time determination and the stored storage information indicating the specific pattern common range are stored in the winning determination result buffer 200, compared to the case where the reserved storage information is not stored. Therefore, it is easy to notify the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” with a small number of operations. As a result, in the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2, when the notification of the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is performed with a small number of operations, the number of operations is increased until the notification is performed. Compared to when necessary, the expectation that the display result in the variable display that was held after the end of the big hit gaming state will be a big hit and the big hit gaming state is expected again, and the expectation that the reach effect of super reach will be executed Etc. are enhanced.

  In the setting example of the notification target selection pattern determination table 142 shown in FIG. 19A, there is a part in which the determination value is assigned to a different notification target selection pattern according to the winning determination result buffer storage content check result. For example, the determination value is assigned to the notification target selection pattern HSP3 only when the winning determination result buffer storage content check result is “There is determination per winning time”. As shown in FIG. 19B, in the notification target selection pattern HSP3, particularly when the notification target storage number is “1” or “2”, the notification execution determination value is extremely small (specifically, “ 3 ”). Therefore, when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2 is notified that there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” with a very small number of operations, the on-hold storage information indicating the winning time determination is stored. The player can recognize that it is stored in the judgment result buffer 200, that is, that the display result in the variable display that is held after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes “big hit” and becomes the big hit gaming state again. To be notified.

  FIG. 20 shows a configuration example of the ending prefetch effect determination table 143 stored in the ROM 121. The ending pre-reading effect determination table 143 is used to determine whether or not to execute the ending pre-reading effect when the jackpot gaming state ends based on the ending pre-reading effect determination random value SR4. It is a table that is referred to. In the ending pre-reading effect determination table 143, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR4 for ending pre-reading effect determination in accordance with the winning determination result buffer storage content check result, there is an effect, or It is assigned to the determination result of presence / absence of pre-reading effect at the time of ending such as no effect.

  In the setting example of the ending pre-reading effect determination table 143 shown in FIG. 20, the determined values are assigned so that the determination rate of the ending pre-reading effect presence / absence differs according to the winning determination result buffer storage content check result. Yes. For example, when the winning determination result buffer storage content check result is “There is a determination per winning time” or “within a specific pattern common range”, only the reserved storage information indicating the outside of the specific pattern common range is displayed. More decision values than those in the case of “other than” are assigned to the determination result with the effect of executing the pre-reading effect at the ending. Therefore, when the stored storage information indicating the winning time determination and the stored storage information indicating the specific pattern common range are stored in the winning determination result buffer 200, compared to the case where the reserved storage information is not stored. The pre-reading effect at the time of ending becomes easy to be executed. As a result, when the pre-reading effect at the ending is executed, the variable display that is held after the end of the big hit gaming state is compared with the case where the normal effect at the ending is executed without executing the pre-reading effect at the ending. The expectation that the display result will be “big hit” and the game will be in the big hit game state again, the expectation that the reach production of super reach will be executed, etc. will be enhanced.

  FIG. 21 shows a configuration example 144 of the operation effect determination table stored in the ROM 121. The operation effect determination table 144 shown in FIG. 21 (A) is a table that is referred to, for example, to determine the effect content (effect mode) of the operation effect executed as the reach effect of super reach to one of a plurality of types. is there. In the operation effect determination table 144, for example, depending on the operation item buffer value, which is the stored value of the operation item buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, the variable display mode of the decorative design, etc. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the numerical value SR5-1 is assigned to one of the operation effect A-1, the operation effect A-2, the operation effect B, the operation effect C-1, and the operation effect C-2 It has been. The operation item buffer value is set to “1” or “2” based on the player setting and operation history. When the operation item buffer value is “1”, the stick controller 30 is selected as the operation item. When the operation item buffer value is “2”, the push button 31B is selected as the operation item.

  FIG. 21B shows an operation item as an operation member that effectively detects an instruction operation by a player with an operation effect determined using the operation effect determination table 144 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, in the operation effect A-1, the variable display result based on the fact that the push button 31B is used and a single shot as a single instruction operation (pressing operation) is performed on the push button 31B. An effect operation for informing the possibility of becoming a “big hit” is executed. In the operation effect A-2, the variable display result is obtained based on the fact that using the push button 31B, continuous firing (continuous hitting) that is a plurality of continuous instruction operations (pressing operations) on the push button 31B is performed. An effect operation for notifying the possibility of a “hit” is performed. In the operation effect B, the stick controller 30 is used to notify the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” based on the instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 being performed. The production operation is performed. In the operation effect C-1, by using the stick controller 30, the content of the effect (effect mode) is changed according to the instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30, and the trigger button 31A is operated once. On the basis of the fact that a single shot as an instruction operation (push-pull operation) is performed, an effect operation for notifying the possibility of the variable display result being a “hit” is executed. In the operation effect C-2, using the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B, the contents of the effect (in response to an instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 or an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B) Based on the fact that a single shot is performed as a single instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A while changing the production mode), the possibility of the variable display result being a “hit” is notified. The production operation is executed.

  In the setting example of the operation effect determination table 144 illustrated in FIG. 21A, there is a portion in which the determination value is assigned to different operation effects depending on the operation item buffer value. For example, when the operation item buffer value is “1”, the determined value is assigned to the operation effect B and the operation effect C-1, while for the operation effect A-1 and the operation effect A-2. No decision value has been assigned. When the operation item buffer value is “2”, the determined value is assigned to the operation effect A-1 and the operation effect A-2, while the operation effect B and the operation effect C-1 are assigned. No decision value has been assigned. Therefore, when the operation item buffer value is “1”, a decision is made to selectively execute the operation effect B and the operation effect C-1 using the stick controller 30, and the operation effect A− using the push button 31B. 1 and the decision to execute the operation effect A-2 are limited. On the other hand, when the operation item buffer value is “2”, it is determined to selectively execute the operation effect A-1 and the operation effect A-2 using the push button 31B, and the stick controller 30 is used. The decision to execute the operation effect B or the operation effect C-1 is limited.

  In the setting example of the operation effect determination table 144 shown in FIG. 21A, there is a portion to which a determination value is assigned so that the determination ratio of each operation effect varies depending on the variable display mode. For example, when the operation item buffer value is “1”, when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”, more decision values are obtained than in the other variable display modes. , Assigned to the operation effect B. With such settings, the expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” can be made different depending on which operation effect is executed.

  In the setting example of the operation effect determination table 144 illustrated in FIG. 21A, there is a portion in which a determined value is assigned to a different operation effect depending on the variable display mode. For example, only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the variable display mode is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the determined value for the operation effect C-2 using both the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B. Is assigned. Therefore, when the operation effect C-2 that is a combined operation effect using both the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B is executed, it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, when the operation effect C-2 using both the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B is executed, it is definitely notified that the display result in the variable display being executed is “big hit”.

  FIG. 21C shows a configuration example of the operation target initial position determination table 145 stored in the ROM 121. The operation target initial position determination table 145 indicates an operation target to be operated by an instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 when the operation effect C-1 or the operation effect C-2 is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine an initial position based on random number value SR5-2 for operation target initial position determination. Here, the operation target by the instruction operation (tilting operation) with respect to the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is, for example, a predetermined effect image (such as an effect image indicating the aim) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the instruction Any device that can be operated (moved) in accordance with the direction of movement. The initial position of the operation target is an operation position (display position) at which the operation target is first arranged when the operation effect C-1 or the operation effect C-2 is started. For example, the display area of the image display device 5 As long as it is selectively determined from a plurality of display positions determined in advance. In the operation effect C-1 and the operation effect C-2, the operation position (display position) of the effect image or the like to be operated is changed according to the player's instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30. I can do it.

  In the operation target initial position determination table 145, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random number SR5-2 for determining the operation target initial position are the upper left position PL1, the left middle position PL2, the lower left position PL3, the middle upper position PC1, They are assigned to a plurality of operation positions (display positions) such as a center position PC2, a middle lower position PC3, an upper right position PR1, a right middle position PR2, and a lower right position PR3. By determining the operation target initial position using such an operation target initial position determination table 145, the initial position of the operation target can be determined to be different at a predetermined rate.

  FIG. 22 shows a configuration example of the jackpot finalizing effect determination table 146 stored in the ROM 121. The jackpot finalizing effect determination table 146 shown in FIG. 22 (A) determines whether or not to execute a jackpot finalizing effect for notifying that the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a big hit in the case of executing it. It is a table referred to in order to determine the type of finalized effect. In the jackpot finalizing effect determination table 146, the numerical value (determined value) compared with the random value SR6 for determining the big hit finalizing effect is that there is no finalizing effect that does not execute the big hit finalizing effect, or the jackpot finalizing effect SP1 to the big hit finalizing effect SP4. Assigned to either.

  FIG. 22 (B) shows the execution timing of the jackpot decision effect determined using the jackpot decision effect determination table 146 shown in FIG. 22 (A). In this embodiment, the execution timing of the effect operation is made different depending on which of jackpot finalizing effect SP1 to jackpot finalizing effect SP4 is executed. The jackpot finalizing effect is, for example, a flash operation for lighting a predetermined flash lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 arranged in the gaming machine frame 3 for a short time, or an operation for outputting a predetermined sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is only necessary to be able to definitely notify that the variable display result is “big hit” by performing one or both of them. In this embodiment, the jackpot finalizing effect SP1 is executed at the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol or the like. The jackpot finalizing effect SP2 is executed when the reach is established in which the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state. The jackpot finalizing effect SP3 is executed when the first instruction operation on the stick controller 30 or the push button 31B is detected in the case where the operation effect is executed as the reach effect of the super reach. The jackpot finalizing effect SP4 is executed in conjunction with the execution of the achievement effect for notifying that the variable display result is “hit” in the operation effect when the operation effect is executed as the reach effect of the super reach. As described above, the big hit finalizing effect SP3 and the big hit finalizing effect SP4 are executed at the execution timing related to the instruction operation to the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B when the operation effect is executed as the reach effect of the super reach. It suffices if it is set as follows.

  FIG. 23 shows a configuration example of the notice effect determination table 147 stored in the ROM 121. The notice effect determination table 147 shown in FIG. 23A determines whether or not to execute a notice effect for notifying the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit”, and the type of the notice effect in the case of executing it. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine. In the notice effect determination table 147, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR7 for determining the notice effect depending on the type of variation pattern indicates that no notice effect is executed or no notice effect YPA1 to notice effect. Assigned to any of YPA4. In addition, it is not limited to what a decision value is assigned according to the kind of fluctuation pattern, A decision value may be assigned according to an individual fluctuation pattern, and according to a variable display result or a variable display mode. A decision value may be assigned.

  FIG. 23B shows the notification content in the notice effect determined using the notice effect determination table 147 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, any one of the notice effect YPA1 to the notice effect YPA4 is selected in accordance with the operation notification content, which is the content of the message notified in response to the instruction operation to the trigger button 31A or the push button 31B of the stick controller 30. It is set to be selectively executable. In other words, any of the notice effects YPA1 to YPA4 may be performed as long as the notice effect of “operation notice” is executed.

  In the setting example of the notice effect determination table 147 shown in FIG. 23A, there is a portion to which the decision value is assigned so that the decision ratio of each notice effect varies depending on the type of the variation pattern. For example, for the notice effect YPA, the most determined value is assigned in the case of a non-reach variation pattern, and is determined according to the reach variation pattern with normal reach, the reach variation pattern with super reach, and the big hit variation pattern. It is set to reduce the value assignment. With these settings, depending on which notice effect is executed, the expectation that the variable display result will be a “big hit”, the expectation that the variable display state of the decorative pattern will reach the reach state, the reach effect of the super reach The expectation that is executed can be made different.

  In the setting example of the notice effect determination table 147 shown in FIG. 23 (A), there are portions where the decision values are assigned to different notice effects depending on the type of variation pattern. For example, for the notice effect YPA4, a determined value is not assigned when it is a non-reach variation pattern, while a determined value is assigned when it is another variation pattern. Thereby, when the notice effect YPA4 is executed, it is determined that at least the variable display state of the decorative symbols is in the reach state. In addition, a notice effect that is assigned a decision value only when the variable display result is “big hit” is provided, and when the notice effect is executed, the display result in the variable display being executed becomes “hit”. May be fixed.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 121 may include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD driving circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, an operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A, the push sensor 35B, the tilt direction sensor unit 32, or the like. An input port for capturing signals and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 are configured. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Electric decoration signal), a drive control signal transmitted to the blower fan 33, a drive control signal transmitted to the vibration motor 34, and the like are output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 24 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (steps). S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, thereby moving the normal symbol variable display and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 24 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). 26 and 27 are flowcharts showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first reads the input port data stored in a predetermined input port register (step S201 in FIG. 26). Here, the input port register is a register in which, for example, a bit value indicating an input state of an external signal at an input port included in the I / O 105 is stored. In this embodiment, the input port data stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / ON) of the first start winning signal that becomes the detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 22A. ) And the input port data stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / OFF) of the second start winning signal that becomes the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 22B. ON).

  It is determined whether or not the bit value [1] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S202). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S202; Yes), the second start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the second start winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, Update so as to count up by adding 1 (step S203). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S202 (step S202; No), the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S204).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S204, it is determined whether or not the bit value in the bit number [0] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S205). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S205; Yes), the first start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the first starting winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, It is updated so as to count up by adding 1 (step S206). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S205 (step S205; No), the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S207).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S206 and S207, it is determined whether or not the first start winning determination count value has reached a predetermined determination value (for example, “2”) predetermined as a winning determination value. (Step S208). At this time, if the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S208; Yes), the starting port buffer value that is the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1” is set (step S209). Further, the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S210).

  If the first start winning determination count value has not reached the winning determination value in step S208 (step S208; No), a valid game ball winning in the first start winning opening is detected by the first start opening switch 22A. In response to this, it is determined whether or not the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211). At this time, if the second start winning determination count value does not reach the winning determination value (step S211; No), a valid game ball winning to the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 22B. In response to the absence, the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211; Yes), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S212). Further, the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S213).

  After executing one of the processes of Steps S210 and S213, the CPU 103 reads the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (Step S214). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read, and the starting port buffer value is When it is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S214 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S215 in FIG. 27). At this time, if the read value in step S214 does not reach the upper limit value, the starting condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is effectively established. For example, after it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 26 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value. The first start condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the one special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the decorative symbol is established. When it is determined in step S211 shown in FIG. 26 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value and then it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, The second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the two special symbol display device 4B and the variable display of the decorative symbol is established.

  Thus, when the read value has not reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; No), 1 is added to the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S216). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, and when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Then, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the total pending storage number count value that is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter that indicates the total pending storage number that is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number ( Step S217).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S217, the CPU 103, among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for type determination is extracted (step S218). Numerical value data indicating each random value extracted in this way is set as reserved data at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit 151A, whereby each random value is stored (step S219). At this time, the start port buffer value is also included in the hold data as start port data, and is set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151A.

  After the random number is stored in step S219, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S220). Subsequently, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S221). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 24 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  When the read value has reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; Yes), after executing the process of step S221, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2”. Determination is made (step S222). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S222; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S223), and then FIG. The process proceeds to step S211 shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2” (step S222; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S224). The start winning determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when both of the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of a game ball that is effective at the same time, both processes are executed by processing executed within 2 milliseconds. A process based on the fact that the switch has detected a start winning of a valid game ball is executed. That is, when it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 26 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing of steps S209, S210, and S214 shown in FIG. 26, after the processing of step S223 is executed in response to the fact that the start port buffer value is “1” in step S222, the processing of step S211 shown in FIG. Proceed to processing. And when it determines with the 2nd start winning determination count value having reached the winning determination value in step S211, after performing the process of step S212-S214 shown in FIG. 26, step S215-S221 shown in FIG. After executing the above process, the process of step S224 is executed in response to the start port buffer value being “2” in step S222, and then the start winning determination process is terminated. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect an effective winning of a game ball at the same time, it is possible to reliably complete the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning random number determination process executed in step S220 of FIG. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result is set to “big hit” in the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 25, FIG. 30) to be described later. It is determined whether or not to control, and the type of jackpot is determined. On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process in step S220 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Thus, it is specified in advance whether or not the special figure display result is the random value MR1 determined to be “big hit” and whether or not the random value MR3 is determined to the specific variation pattern with super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, the special graphic display result becomes “big hit” or a specific variation pattern with super reach. Based on the prediction result, it is possible to determine whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 28, the CPU 103 first specifies a special figure display result corresponding to the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S218 of FIG. (Step S401). For example, in the process of step S401, the special figure display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 9 is selected and set in the usage table. Here, when setting to the use table, for example, the storage address (head address) of the table data in the ROM 101 may be set to a table pointer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. Subsequently, by referring to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in the use table, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is determined as “big hit” according to the random value MR1 extracted in step S218. Identified. More specifically, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is compared with the determined value stored in the special figure display result determination table 130, and the special figure display to which the determined value matching the random value MR1 is assigned. Specify whether the result is a “big hit”. Here, regardless of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” with reference to the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the short-time state in the special figure display result determination table 130. It may be specified whether or not. The numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random number MR1 extracted in step S218 of FIG. 27 by the processing of step S401 is a determination numerical value for which the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”. It is determined whether or not.

  Following the processing of step S401, it is determined whether or not the specified special figure display result is a “big hit” (step S402). At this time, if the specified special figure display result is “big hit” (step S402; Yes), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S403). When the start port buffer value is “1” (step S403; “1”), a command B102H (FIG. 5A and FIG. 5A) serving as a first start port winning designation command for notifying “winning time determination”. C)) is set for transmission from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S404), and the random number determination process at the time of winning is completed. On the other hand, if the starting port buffer value is “2” in step S403 (step S403; “2”), a command B202H (second starting port winning designation command for notifying “winning time determination”) ( After setting for transmitting the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (see FIGS. 5A and 5C) (step S405), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  When the special figure display result is not “big hit” in step S402 (step S402; No), the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S218 in FIG. 27 is the specific pattern. It is determined whether it is within the common range (step S406). Here, in the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B shown in FIG. 11B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 132C shown in FIG. Regardless of the number of reserved memories, if the random value MR3 for determining the special figure variation pattern type is within the range of “230” to “251”, a variation pattern involving at least super reach (super reach α or super reach β) The included variation pattern type CA2-3 is determined. Therefore, in the process of step S406, for example, as shown in FIG. 29, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “230” to “251”, it may be determined that it is within the specific pattern common range. That is, the CPU 103 determines that one of the determined values “230” to “251” set as at least a part of the determined value corresponding to the variation pattern type CA2-3 including the variation pattern with super reach and the random value SR3 By determining whether or not they match, it is possible to determine whether or not a variation pattern with super reach is determined.

  When it is determined in step S406 that the random value MR3 is within the specific pattern common range (step S406; Yes), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S407). ). When the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S407; “1”), the command B101H (FIG. 5A and FIG. 5A) serving as the first starting port winning designation command for notifying “within a specific pattern common range” is sent. (See (C)) is set for transmission from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S408), and the random number determination process at the time of winning is completed. On the other hand, if the starting port buffer value is “2” in step S407 (step S407; “2”), the command B201H serving as the second starting port winning designation command notifying “within a specific pattern common range” is sent. (See FIGS. 5 (A) and 5 (C)) is set to transmit from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S409), and the winning random number determination process ends.

  When it is determined in step S406 that the random value MR3 is outside the specific pattern common range (step S406; No), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S410). ). When the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S410; “1”), a command B100H (FIG. 5A) serving as a first starting port winning designation command for notifying “outside the specific pattern common range”. (See (C)) is set for transmission from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S411), and the random number determination process at the time of winning is finished. On the other hand, if the starting port buffer value is “2” in step S410 (step S410; “2”), the command B200H serving as the second starting port winning designation command for notifying “outside the specific pattern common range” is notified. (See FIGS. 5 (A) and 5 (C)) is set to transmit from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S412), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the process of step S401, the special figure display result determination table 130 refers to the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state. , It is specified whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit”. On the other hand, a change in the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be predicted, and the table data referred to in the special figure display result determination table 130 may be switched based on the prediction result. As an example, if the probability variation control is continuously performed until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, when it is determined in step S402 that the special figure display result is decided to be “big hit”, FIG. By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10 based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determining random value MR2 extracted in step S218, the jackpot type is “15R uncertain change”, “15R probability change”. ”Or“ 16R probability change ”is determined. When it is determined that the big hit type is not “15R uncertain change” but “15R probability change” or “16R probability change”, the probability change determination flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like is set to the on state. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit type is “15R non-probable change”, the probabilistic change determination flag is cleared and turned off. In step S401, it is determined whether the probability change determination flag is on or off. At this time, if the probability change determination flag is ON, whether the special figure display result is “big hit” by referring to the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the probable change state in the special figure display result determination table 130. Specify whether or not. On the other hand, when the probability change determination flag is OFF, the special figure display result determination table 130 may refer to table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state. When such a process is executed, the normal state corresponds to the case where the game state when the special figure game based on the hold data stored in the special figure hold storage unit 151A is started is the probability change state. It is possible to specify the special figure display result using the table data in which the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” at a higher rate than in the time-short state, and more accurately according to the actual gaming state Special display results can be specified.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 28, the determination based on the random value MR1 or the random value MR3 is performed in the process of step S402 or the process of step S406, and then the start opening is performed by the processes of steps S403, S407, and S410. It is determined whether the buffer value is “1” or “2”. On the other hand, the determination based on the random number value MR1 or the random value MR3 may be performed after the start port buffer value is determined first.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. Execute the process.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, whether to start the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 151A. A determination is made whether or not. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determined by the variable display result. Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) One of the lost symbols) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types based on the result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and the result of determination of the variation pattern type. Corresponding to the above, a process for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is included.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer is used. The elapsed time is measured. It is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed in the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B in the second special symbol display device 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the figure by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on, and when the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. To do. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, you may make it set the frequency | count of making a special winning opening open, and the upper limit of the period which makes a special winning opening open. As an example, when the big hit type is controlled to the 15R big hit state corresponding to “15R non-probable change” or “15R positive change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. Is set to “15”, and the number of times of opening of the big winning opening (maximum value of the number of opening of the large winning opening) is set to “15”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is controlled to the 16R big hit state corresponding to “16R probability change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. Then, the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big prize opening is set to “16”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door may be executed.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is open has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until time elapses and processing that performs various settings for controlling to a probable change state and a short time state corresponding to the jackpot type are included.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 30, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the total number of reserved memories is “0” (step S231). For example, in the process of step S231, it is only necessary to read the total pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the total number of reserved memories is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), the special data is stored as the reserved data stored in association with the reserved number “1” in the special figure storage unit 151A. The random number value MR1 for determining the display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the starting port data are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S232, for example, the total pending storage count value is decremented by 1 and updated, so that the total pending storage count is updated by 1 and the special figure reserve storage unit 151A holds the reservation number. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 and the like stored in the entries lower than “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted upward by one entry (step S233). . At this time, it is determined whether the starting port indicated by the starting port data included in the hold data read in step S232 is the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port (step S234).

  When it is determined in step S234 that it is the first start winning opening (step S234; "1"), for example, by subtracting the first reserved memory number count value and updating it, the first special figure reserved memory is obtained. The number is updated so that 1 is subtracted (step S235). At this time, the value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to “1” (step S236).

  When it is determined in step S234 that it is the second start winning opening (step S234; "2"), for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value, the second special figure reserved memory, etc. The number is updated so that 1 is subtracted (step S237). At this time, the value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S236 and S238, a special table is used as a usage table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result, is “big hit” or “lost”. The figure display result determination table 130 is selected and set (step S239). The CPU 103 refers to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in this manner, so that the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is “big hit” or “lost”. The special figure display result is determined to be either “big hit” or “losing” in accordance with which of the determined values assigned to each special figure display result of “” (step S240). At this time, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S240 is “big hit” (step S241).

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is a “hit” (step S241; Yes), the big win flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the big hit type determining random value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is “15R uncertain change”, “15R positive change”, “16R”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to each jackpot type of “probability change”, it is determined whether the jackpot type is “15R non-probability change”, “15R probability change”, or “16R probability change” (step) S244). Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is “15R uncertain variation”, the jackpot type buffer value is “0”, “15R probability variation” is “1”, and “16R probability variation” is “2”. .

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241; No), after executing the processing of step S245, a result of a prior decision as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, A confirmed special symbol is set corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the gaming state (step S246). As an example, when it is determined in step S241 that the special figure display result is not “big hit”, the result is a lost symbol corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S241 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, “3”, “5”, which are big hit symbols, according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S244, One of the special symbols indicating the number “7” is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “15R non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that becomes the 15R non-probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “15R probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “5” that becomes the 15R probability change big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. According to the determination result that the big hit type is “16R probability variation”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the 16R probability variation big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S246, the special symbol process flag value is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S247), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S231, a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S248), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A is selected and set as a use table for determining the fluctuation pattern type as one of a plurality of types (step S262). ). Further, for example, by reading the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, it is specified whether the big hit type is “15R uncertain change”, “15R probability change”, or “16R probability change”. (Step S263).

  When the big hit flag is OFF in step S261 (step S261; No), for example, by determining whether or not the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is ON, the time reduction state or the probability change state is determined. In step S264, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is performed. At this time, when the time is not short (step S264; No), the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B is selected as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Set (step S265). On the other hand, when the time is short (step S264; Yes), the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 132C is selected as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. And set (step S266).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S263, S265, and S266, the usage table is set based on numerical data indicating a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example. By referring to the variation pattern type determination table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S267). Here, in the process of step S267, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition is determined. Whether or not to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. First, using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like, the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing module. it can.

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B shown in FIG. 11B and the loss variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. 11C, the special figure reservation storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. In this case, more determination values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 than in the case where the number of special figure reservations stored is less than the predetermined number. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B, when the number of special figure hold memory is “3” or more, the fluctuation pattern is compared with the case where the number of special figure hold memory is less than “3”. Compared to the case where many decision values are assigned to the type CA1-2, and the number of special figure hold memory is “6” or more, the special figure hold memory number is less than “6”. Thus, many decision values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time medium) 132C, when the special figure hold memory number is “1” or more, compared to the case where the special figure hold memory number is “0” less than “1”, When a large number of decision values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2, and the number of special figure hold memories is “2” or more, and the number of special figure hold memories is less than “2” In comparison, many decision values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2. The variation pattern type CA1-2 includes a variation pattern PA3-1, a variation pattern PA3-2, a variation pattern PB3-1, and a variation pattern PB3-2 with super reach, and a non-reach variation pattern with a short special pattern variation time. Variation pattern PA1-2 is included. Therefore, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the special figure holding memory number when the start condition (first start condition or second start condition) is satisfied is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. The variation pattern type is determined using a decision value in which the number of decision values corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-2 is set larger than when the number of reserved memories is less than the predetermined number. As a result, the average special figure fluctuation time can be varied according to the number of special figure hold memories when the start condition is satisfied, and particularly when the number of special figure hold memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, It is possible to prevent the situation in which the operation rate of variable display is lowered as much as possible by shortening the fluctuation time.

  After determining the variation pattern type in step S267, the variation pattern determination table 133 is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns (step S268). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S268 based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step S269). The numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 104, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, or the like when the process of step S269 is executed, or the first start winning prize What is extracted at the time of starting winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the mouth and the second starting winning opening is detected is stored as the hold data in the special figure holding storage unit 151A together with the random numbers MR1 to MR3. Also good.

  In the process of step S269, whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition, Regardless of whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the second starting condition, a common random Using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 that is used for determining the variation pattern updated by a counter or the like, the variation pattern can be determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing module. Further, in the process of step S269, regardless of the result of determination of the variation pattern type in step S267, a plurality of types of variation patterns are generated by a common processing module using numerical data indicating a common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Either can be determined.

  After the change pattern is determined in step S269, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the change pattern determination result is set (step S270). After that, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S271). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S271, settings for transmitting various commands for use in starting the change of the special symbol are performed (step S272). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. In the designated transmission command buffer, the data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is a buffer designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the area. When the setting in step S272 is performed, every time the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. A gaming state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, it may be transmitted in the order of the game state designation command and the pending storage number notification command. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S273), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is ended.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stopping process shown in FIG. 32, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special figure fixed display flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 152 is on (step S291). Here, the special figure fixed display flag is set to the on state by the process of step S295 described later in response to the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game being derived and displayed.

  When the special figure fixed display flag is OFF in step S291 (step S291; No), settings for deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol are performed (step S292). At this time, a setting for transmitting the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). Further, a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) set in advance as the special figure confirmation display time is set (step S294). For example, in the process of step S294, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the special figure confirmation display time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Then, after the special figure confirmation display flag is set to the on state (step S295), the special symbol stop process is terminated. Thus, after the fixed special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S292, the special symbol process processing according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special symbol fixed display time set in step S294 elapses. Each time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S291 that the special figure fixed display flag is on.

  When the special figure confirmation display flag is ON in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value that is the stored value of the game control process timer in which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S294 is read, and whether or not the timer value has become “0”. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. If the timer value is a value other than “0”, the game control process timer value is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. That's fine. If the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop process is terminated to wait until the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed.

  When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag to turn it off (step S297), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on. Determination is made (step S298). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S298; Yes), a predetermined time is set as a big hit start production waiting time (step S299). Also, a setting for transmitting a big hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the big hit start specifying command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the pointer.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S300, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S301). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S302). For example, as the processing in step S302, processing for clearing the probability variation flag and the time-shortening flag to turn it off, processing for clearing the time-shortening counter for counting the remaining number of times for the special figure game for which the time reduction control is executed, etc. May be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S303), and then the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether or not the time shortening control or the high opening control in the probability variation state or the short time state is ended (step S304). For example, in the process of step S304, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value which is the stored value of the time reduction counter is updated by subtracting 1 for example. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the short-time end determination value, the time-shortening control or the high opening control in the probability changing state or the short-time state may be ended by clearing the short-time flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S304 may be ended. When the gaming state is a probable change state, the time reduction control or the high opening control is continued until the next variable display result is “big hit” or until a predetermined number of special game is executed. Also good. Alternatively, when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the time reduction control may be terminated by the process of step S304. On the other hand, for the probability variation control, until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or further predetermined It may be continued until the number of special figure games is executed.

  Further, in the process of step S304, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for probability variation control termination determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and probability variation control termination determination stored in the ROM 101 or the like in advance is performed. It may be determined whether or not the probability variation control is ended by referring to the table or when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control reaches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S304, the process for ending the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, the process of determining whether or not to end the probability variation control based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the probability variation control is determined (predetermined), for example, in step S240 shown in FIG. It may be executed before.

  After executing the process of step S304, the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S305), and then the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot ending presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the post-hit release post-processing in step S116 shown in FIG. 25, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time is set. Set to the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S321, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0” or the like). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not the game has been done. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S322). The big hit type is identified as “15R uncertain change”, “15R probability change”, or “16R probability change”. At this time, it is determined whether or not it is a 15R non-probable variation big hit corresponding to the case where the identified big hit type is “15R non-probable variation” (step S323).

  If it is determined in step S323 that the 15R non-probable big hit has been made (step S323; Yes), a setting for starting control for changing the gaming state to the time-saving state is performed (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction flag to the on state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, “70”) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game executable in the time reduction state to the time reduction counter Set to. On the other hand, when the big hit type is determined to be “15R probability change” or “16R probability change” (step S323; No), setting for starting the control to change the gaming state to the probability change state is performed (step S325). . For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state. Further, even when the probability variation state is set, a count initial value may be set in the time reduction counter corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game in which the time reduction control is performed.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S324 and S325, the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S326), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 34 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 to the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) elapses based on, for example, CTC register settings. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process of step S75, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in the decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, About the control contents of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as the rendering model, the driving operation of the blower fan 33 and the vibration motor 34, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 etc. Is done.

  Following the effect control process in step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data shown is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S74 of FIG. 34 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S501). For example, the effect control command received on the side of the effect control board 12 is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, and the effect control CPU 120 reads the command stored in the effect control command receiving buffer and stores the contents. It is only necessary that the received effect control command can be specified by checking.

  If it is determined in step S501 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S501; Yes), display update setting corresponding to the first starting opening winning is set (step S502). For example, in the process of step S502, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start prize storage display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 passes through the first start prize opening (enters). In accordance with the establishment of the first start condition by the detection of the gaming ball, the display setting for changing to the blue display may be performed.

  When it is determined in step S501 that the first start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S501; No), it is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning designation command has been received (step S503). At this time, if it is determined that the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S503; Yes), display update corresponding to the second starting opening winning is set (step S504). For example, in the process of step S504, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start prize storage display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 passes through the second start prize opening (enters). The display setting for changing to the red display may be performed in accordance with the establishment of the second start condition by the detection of the gaming ball.

  After executing one of the processes of steps S502 and S504, the notification contents by the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command are stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, the EXT data of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is used as reserved storage information, and the beginning of the empty entry in the winning determination result buffer 200 By setting to, the hold storage information may be stored. At this time, start port information corresponding to the MODE data of the first start port winning designation command or the second starting port winning designation command is also included in the hold storage information and set at the head of the empty entry in the winning determination result buffer 200. Just do it.

  When the processing of step S505 is executed, the determination result storage number maximum value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S506), and the command analysis processing is terminated. For example, in the process of step S506, 1 is added to the determination result storage number maximum value by adding 1 to the determination result storage count value that is the stored value of the determination result storage counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. What should I do? The determination result storage counter is for counting the number of the stored information stored in the winning determination result buffer 200, and is notified by the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command. The maximum value of the storage number associated with the determination result stored in the result buffer 200 can be specified by the determination result storage count value.

  When it is determined in step S503 that the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S503; No), whether or not a variation start command such as a first variation start command or a second variation start command has been received. Is determined (step S507). At this time, if it is determined that a variation start command has been received (step S507; Yes), for example, a variation start command reception flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like is set to an on state (step S508). Further, the stored contents of the winning determination result buffer 200 are shifted (step S509). For example, in the winning determination result buffer 200, the on-hold storage information stored in association with the storage number “1” is deleted, and the entries lower than the storage number “1” (for example, the storage numbers “2” to “8”). "Pending storage information stored in the entry corresponding to") is shifted upward by one entry. Then, for example, by subtracting 1 from the determination result storage count value, the determination result storage number maximum value is updated to be subtracted by 1 (step S510), and the command analysis processing is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S507 that the change start command has not been received (step S507; No), after setting is performed according to another command received from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 (step S511). ), The command analysis process is terminated.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 34 as the effect control process. In this effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following steps S170 to S176 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. To do.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process starts variable display of decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 based on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command from the main board 11 is received. It includes processing for determining whether or not.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform the variable display of decorative symbols and other various effects, the process of determining the fixed decorative symbols and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbols and the type of display result is included. .

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, and displays the decorative pattern. Processing for performing various effects control during variable display is included. After performing such effect control, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” in response to the reading of the end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative design from the effect control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation. The

  The variable display stop process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This variable display stop process is a complete stop display (derivation) of a finalized symbol as a final stop symbol that becomes a variable display result of a decorative symbol in response to reception of a symbol finalization designation command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like. Display). Alternatively, in response to the end code being read out from the special-figure fluctuation effect control pattern, the finalized design may be displayed in a complete stop (derived display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, it is autonomous on the side of the production control board 12 without using the production control command from the main board 11. The fixed display pattern can be derived and displayed on the screen to determine the variable display result. In addition, the variable display stop process is based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, the determination result of whether or not the big hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the like. Includes a process for determining whether or not is started. When the big hit gaming state is started, the value of the production process flag is updated to “4”, while when the variable display result corresponds to “losing”, the big hit gaming state is not started, The effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  The jackpot display process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The jackpot display process includes a process for executing a jackpot notification effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the jackpot gaming state based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 11. . Then, when the execution of the big hit notification effect ends, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, a sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and a game effect lamp 9 or a decoration is output by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the big hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the LED for the game is executed. Further, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving the big hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit end effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and displays an effect image based on the set content in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, a sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and a game effect lamp 9 or a decoration is output by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the LED for the game. Thereafter, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process executed in step S170 of FIG. In the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation start command reception flag is on (step S451). The variation start command reception flag is set to the on state when the first variation start command and the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 11 are received (see step S508 in FIG. 35). When the first variation start command or the second variation start command has not been received and the variation start command reception flag is off (step S451; No), it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined operation item selection period. (Step S452). As an example, the operation item selection period is started based on the reception of a customer waiting demo designation command transmitted from the main board 11, and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed, or an operation item is selected. It may be ended in response to detection of an instruction operation to be instructed. Alternatively, if the instruction operation for instructing the selection of the operation item is not detected, the operation item selection period may continue until the decorative symbol variable display is started.

  When it is the operation item selection period in step S452 (step S452; Yes), effect operation control for executing the operation item selection effect is performed (step S453). As an example, in the process of step S453, according to the effect control execution data (for example, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) read from the effect control pattern prepared in advance for executing the operation item selection effect. In order to perform an effect operation including part or all of the effect image display, the output of sound effects, and the lighting of the lamp, various commands are created and the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14 may be transmitted.

  Following the processing of step S453, it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (tilting operation) for the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 has been detected based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the tilt direction sensor unit 32 (step S453). S454). At this time, if the tilt operation is not detected (step S454; No), the instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 is detected based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A. It is determined whether or not there has been (step S455).

  When a tilting operation is detected in step S454 (step S454; Yes) or a push-pull operation is detected in step S455 (step S455; Yes), for example, provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 The operation item buffer value which is the stored value of the operation item buffer is set to “1” (step S456).

  If no push / pull operation is detected in step S455 (step S455; No), whether or not an instruction operation (push operation) for the push button 31B has been detected based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the push sensor 35B or the like. Is determined (step S457). At this time, if a pressing operation is detected (step S457; Yes), the operation item buffer value is set to “2” (step S458).

  After performing any of the processes of steps S456 and S458, the operation item selection period may be terminated (step S459). When it is determined in step S452 that it is not the operation item selection period (step S452; No), when no pressing operation is detected in step S457 (step S457), or after the processing of step S459 is executed. Then, after performing the production operation control for executing the demonstration display production (step S460), the variable display start waiting process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S450, various commands are created according to the presentation control execution data read from the presentation control pattern prepared in advance to execute the demonstration display presentation and transmitted to the display control unit 123 and the like. Thus, it is only necessary to control the rendering operation including the display of the rendering image.

  When the variation start command reception flag is on in step S451 (step S451; Yes), the variation start command reception flag is cleared and turned off (step S461). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S462), and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  FIG. 38 shows an effect display example in the operation item selection effect. If it is determined in step S452 shown in FIG. 37 that it is the operation item selection period, first in step S453, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 38A is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By performing the display or the like, an effect operation is performed to prompt the player to select which operation member to use as the operation item between the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B. Thereafter, for example, along with the display of the effect image as shown in FIG. 38B, an operation detection period for effectively detecting an instruction operation on the operation rod 30A, the trigger button 31A, and further the push button 31B of the stick controller 30; Become. When the player performs an instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30, it is determined in step S454 in FIG. 37 that there is a tilt operation, and an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A ( When the push-pull operation is performed, it is determined in step S455 of FIG. 37 that the trigger button 31A is operated, and thus the operation item buffer value is set to “1” in step S456. At this time, it is only necessary to notify that the stick controller 30 has been selected as the operation item, for example, by displaying an effect image as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the player performs an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B, it is determined in step S457 in FIG. 37 that there is an operation on the push button 31B, so that the operation item buffer is displayed in step S458. The value is set to “2”. At this time, unlike the effect image shown in FIG. 38C, it is only necessary to be able to notify that the push button 31B has been selected as the operation item by displaying an effect image notifying the selection of the push button 31B.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S521). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S521; Yes), it is designated by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S522).

  If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. In addition, by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table or the like, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, a difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S521; No), a re-lottery effect or a probable change promotion effect is performed in response to the special figure display result being “big hit”. Settings for execution are performed (step S525). In the process of step S525, it is determined whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect by referring to a re-lottery determination table prepared in advance. In the re-lottery determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value for determining the re-lottery effect execution may be assigned to the determination result of whether to execute the re-lottery effect. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the re-lottery determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random value for the re-lottery effect execution determination extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. A determination is made as to whether or not to execute a re-lottery effect. Further, for example, by referring to a probability variation promotion determination table prepared in advance, it is determined whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion effect. In the probability variation promotion determination table, multiple probability variation promotion effect patterns prepared according to the combination of probability variation promotion effects to be executed during the jackpot gaming state or at the end of the jackpot gaming state are compared with random numbers for determining the probability variation promotion effect. As long as a numerical value (determined value) is assigned. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the probability change promotion determination table based on numerical data indicating the random value for the probability change promotion effect determination extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. It is determined whether or not the promotion effect is to be executed, and the probability variation promotion effect pattern when it is executed is determined.

  In the re-lottery determination table, each determination result is changed so that the ratio of executing the re-lottery effect varies depending on whether the big hit type is “15R uncertain change”, “15R probability change”, or “16R probability change”. It is only necessary that a determined value is assigned to it. In addition, when the big hit type is “15R non-probable change”, as a re-lottery effect, the decorative symbols constituting the non-probable big hit combination are displayed temporarily stopped, and finally the non-probable big hit combination is re-changed. A re-lottery failure effect for notifying that the probability change promotion has failed is executed by deriving and displaying the confirmed decorative symbols to be configured. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “15R probability variation” or “16R probability variation”, the decorative symbols constituting the non-probability variation big hit combination are temporarily stopped and displayed as a re-lottery effect. It is only necessary to execute a re-lottery success effect that informs that the probability variation promotion has succeeded by deriving and displaying the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the probability variation big hit combination. Or, even if the big hit type is “15R probability variation” or “16R probability variation”, after the re-lottery failure effect that notifies that the probability variation promotion has failed as the re-lottery effect is executed, the probability change notification is performed by executing the probability change promotion effect, etc. May be performed.

  In the re-lottery determination table, when the big hit type is “15R probability variation”, a larger number of determination values than the determination result that the re-lottery effect is not executed are assigned to the determination result that the re-lottery effect is executed. You may set as follows. Thereby, when it becomes 15R probability variation big hit, the rate at which probability change notification is performed in the re-lottery effect before the big hit gaming state is started can be increased. On the other hand, in the re-lottery determination table, when the big hit type is “16R probability variation”, a larger number of determination values than the determination result that the re-lottery effect is executed determine that the re-lottery effect is not executed. You may set so that it may be assigned to a result. As a result, in the case of 16R probability variation big hit, the probability that probability variation notification is performed in the probability variation promotion effect executed in the big hit gaming state or at the end of the big hit gaming state is higher than the proportion in which the probability variation notification is performed in the re-lottery effect. can do.

  In the re-lottery determination table, when the big hit type is “15R probability variation”, many determination values are re-seen compared to the determination result that the re-lottery failure effect is executed or the re-lottery effect is not executed. You may make it assign to the determination result to the effect of performing a lottery success production. Even if it does in this way, when it becomes 15R probability variation big hit, the ratio by which probability variation notification is performed by re-lottery effect can be made high. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “16R probability variation”, a larger number of determination values than the determination result that the re-lottery success effect is executed are obtained. You may make it assign to the determination result to the effect that a lottery production is not performed. Even if it does in this way, when it becomes 16R probability variation big hit, the rate at which probability change notification is performed by the probability variation promotion effect can be made higher than the rate at which probability change notification is performed by the re-lottery effect.

  Due to the setting of the re-lottery determination table, a notification effect (a re-lottery effect or a probable change promotion effect) for notifying the probability change is performed when the probability change state is set as compared to the case where the time reduction state is reached after the jackpot game state is ended. The timing is likely to be delayed, and the notification effect (probability promotion effect) is executed at a late timing, so that it is only necessary to enhance the expectation that the game value is more likely to be higher than the short-time state after the big hit gaming state. In addition, when the number of executions of the round in the big hit gaming state is smaller (15R probability variation big hit) than when it is larger (16R probability variation big hit), the timing of performing the notification effect (re-lottery effect or probability variation promotion effect) for probability change notification If the notification effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed at a late timing, the number of executions of the round in the big hit gaming state increases, and the sense of expectation of becoming a big hit gaming state with a high gaming value can be enhanced. Good.

  In the probability variation promotion determination table, each determination result is changed so that the ratio of executing the probability variation promotion effect varies depending on whether the jackpot type is “15R non-probability variation”, “15R probability variation”, or “16R probability variation”. It is only necessary that a determined value is assigned to it. When the jackpot type is “15R non-probable change”, a probable change promotion effect that notifies that the probable change promotion has failed is executed as the probable change promotion effect. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “15R probability variation” or “16R probability variation”, the probability variation promotion success effect for notifying that the probability variation promotion is successful may be executed as the probability variation promotion effect. Or, even if the jackpot type is “15R probability variation” or “16R probability variation”, a probability variation promotion failure effect that notifies that the probability variation promotion has failed is executed as a jackpot promotion effect, and then a probability variation promotion as an ending promotion effect Probability promotion success production which notifies that it succeeded to may be performed.

  Note that the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect or a probability variation promotion effect may be determined separately or may be determined collectively. For example, a plurality of types of promotion effect patterns that are combinations of a re-lottery effect and a probability change promotion effect are prepared in advance. The promotion effect pattern includes, for example, a pattern in which the re-lottery success effect is executed and the probability change promotion effect is not executed, a pattern in which the probability change promotion effect is executed without executing the re-lottery effect, and a re-lottery failure effect is executed and the probability change promotion is executed. It is only necessary that a pattern for performing the effect is prepared in advance. Further, for example, the ROM 121 stores a promotion effect pattern determination table in which a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value for determining a promotion effect pattern is assigned to each promotion effect pattern. In the promotion effect pattern determination table, if the jackpot type is “15R uncertain change”, “15R probability change”, or “16R probability change”, the determined value assignment to the promotion effect pattern is different. Good. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the promotion effect pattern extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 124 and the effect control counter setting unit 193, the promotion effect pattern determination table is referred to by referring to the promotion effect pattern determination table. Decide on either. At this time, it is determined in a lump whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect and the probable change promotion effect corresponding to the promotion effect pattern.

  The determination as to whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect or the probable promotion effect is not limited to the effect performed on the effect control board 12 side, but the effect control in which the determination result on the main board 11 side is transmitted from the main board 11 It may be notified by a command, and the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect or a promising promotion effect may be specified based on the effect control command.

  After the process of step S525 is executed, a combination of confirmed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the jackpot combination is determined (step S526). As an example, in the process of step S526, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Stop by aligning with the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 by referring to the stored predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined.

  In the process of step S526, for example, when the jackpot type is “15R non-probable change”, one of the non-probable change symbols (for example, decorative symbols indicating numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) is obtained. It is selected and set to the final stop symbol constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination. When the big hit type is “15R probability variation” or “16R probability variation”, either the non-probability variation symbol or the probability variation symbol may be selected depending on, for example, the presence or absence of the probability variation promotion effect. More specifically, in the case where the probable change promotion effect (including the ending promotion effect) is executed after the jackpot gaming state is started, as in the case where the jackpot type is “15R non-probable change”, the non-probable change pattern Is selected and set to the final stop symbol constituting the non-probable variation jackpot combination. On the other hand, for example, regardless of whether or not the re-lottery effect before the big hit gaming state is started, the probable promotion effect (including the ending promotion effect) is executed after the big hit gaming state is started. If not, one of the probability variation symbols is selected and set to the final stop symbol constituting the probability variation jackpot combination. In the case where a re-lottery effect is executed during execution of a big hit notification effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the big hit gaming state after the final stop symbol resulting in the variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed. One may be selected from the non-probable variation symbols and set to the final stop symbol constituting the non-probability variation big hit combination.

  When the jackpot type is “15R probability variation” or “16R probability variation”, the presence or absence of the probability variation promotion effect is determined depending on which of the non-probability variation symbol and the probability variation symbol is selected as the final stop symbol. It may be. In other words, when a non-probable variable symbol is selected and set to the final stop symbol that constitutes a non-probable variable jackpot combination, it is decided to execute a probabilistic promotion effect, while a probable variable symbol is selected to configure a probabilistic jackpot combination When the final stop symbol to be set is set, it may be determined that the probability change promotion effect is not executed. As described above, either the determination of the final stop symbol and the determination of whether or not to execute the probability change promotion effect may be performed first.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S523, S524, and S526, by performing the variable display effect setting process (step S527), settings for performing other effect control during variable display are performed. Subsequently, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S528). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of special-figure variation effect control patterns prepared in correspondence with, for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. Further, for example, a plurality of effect controls prepared for executing part or all of a variable display effect, a notice effect, a jackpot finalizing effect, an operation effect, etc. based on the setting by the variable display effect setting process in step S527. Any of the patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern.

  After executing the processing of step S528, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (step S529). . And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design etc. in the image display apparatus 5 is performed (step S530). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the special-figure variation effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S528 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S531), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect setting process executed in step S527 of FIG. In the variable display effect setting process shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 120 first sets these variable display effects corresponding to the case where the variable display effect such as “slip” or “pseudo-run” is executed. (Step SA01). For example, when variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” are executed in accordance with a change pattern specified by a change pattern specifying command transmitted from the main board 11, the temporary display is temporarily performed in these variable display effects. What is necessary is just to determine the decorative design etc. which are displayed to be stopped.

  Following the processing in step SA01, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is a variation pattern with super reach (step SA02). At this time, if the variation pattern is accompanied by super reach (step SA02; Yes), the operation effect determination table 144 is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of operation effects (step SA03). ). At this time, the operation item buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 or the like is read (step SA04). Further, numerical data indicating the random number SR5-1 for determining the operation effect is extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193 (SA05). Then, based on the random value SR5-1 extracted in step SA05 and the like, the operation effect is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the operation effect determination table 144 selected as the use table (step SA06). At this time, it is determined whether the determination result in step SA06 is the operation effect A-1 or the operation effect A-2 or an operation effect other than these (step SA07).

  When the operation effect is an operation effect other than the operation effect A-1 and the operation effect A-2 in Step SA07 (Step SA07; No), the operation effect using at least one of the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the trigger button 31A. Is determined to execute the air blow vibration effect by driving the blower fan 33 and the vibration motor 34 (step SA08). The blowing vibration effect is obtained by driving the blowing fan 33 and blowing air toward the stick controller 30, or driving the vibration motor 34 to vibrate the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 so that an instruction operation to the stick controller 30 is performed. What is necessary is just to make a player recognize that it is effective. It is not limited to the air blow by the blower fan 33 or the vibration by the vibration motor 34. For example, the instruction operation is effective by any effect operation such as lighting a light emitting member such as an LED built in the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30. It is only necessary that the player can recognize that it is.

  When the process of step SA08 is executed, it is determined whether the determination result in step SA06 is the operation effect C-1 or the operation effect C-2 or an operation effect B different from these (step SA09). When the operation effect C-1 or the operation effect C-2 is set (step SA09; Yes), the initial operation target that operates according to the instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 in the operation effect is performed. The operation target initial position determination table 145 is selected and set as a use table for determining the position (step SA10). Further, numerical data indicating the random number value SR5-2 for determining the operation target initial position is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step SA11). Thereafter, the initial position of the operation target is determined by referring to the operation target initial position determination table 145 selected as the use table based on the random value SR5-2 extracted in step SA11 (step SA12).

  When it is not a fluctuation pattern with super reach in step SA02 (step SA02; No), or when it is operation effect A-1 or operation effect A-2 in step SA07 (step SA07; Yes), in step SA09 When the operation effect B is other than the operation effect C-1 and the operation effect C-2 (step SA09; No), or after executing the process of step SA12, for example, a display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11 Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step SA13).

  When the special figure display result is “big hit” in step SA13 (step SA13; Yes), as a use table for determining whether or not to execute the big hit finalizing effect and the type of the big hit finalizing effect in the case of execution. Then, the big hit finalizing effect determination table 146 is selected and set (step SA14). Further, numerical data indicating the random value SR6 for determining the big hit fixed effect is extracted from the random number circuit 124, the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, and the like (step SA15). Then, based on the random value SR6 extracted in step SA15, the jackpot finalizing effect including whether or not to execute the jackpot finalizing effect is determined by referring to the jackpot finalizing effect determining table 146 selected as the use table. Perform (step SA16).

  In step SA13, when the special figure display result is not “big hit” but “losing” (step SA13; No), after executing the process of step SA16, whether or not the notice effect is executed is executed. The notice effect determination table 147 is selected and set as a use table for determining the type of the notice effect in the case (step SA17). Further, numerical data indicating the random value SR7 for determining the notice effect is extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step SA18). At this time, for example, the decorative display variable display mode may be specified according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Then, based on the random value SR7 extracted in step SA18, etc., by referring to the notice effect determination table 147 selected as the use table, the notice effect including whether or not to execute the notice effect is determined. (Step SA19), the variable display effect setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of FIG. In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, an effect control process timer value (step S551). ). As an example, in the process of step S551, when the production control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 subtraction) and an end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the updated production control process timer value, etc. It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  When the variable display time has not elapsed in step S551 (step S551; Yes), for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern, the effect operation control related to the display of the decorative design is performed. (Step S552). Subsequently, the notice effect control process (step S553) and the big hit confirmation effect control process (step S554) are sequentially executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern in the current variable display is accompanied by super reach (step S555). At this time, if the variation pattern is not accompanied by super reach (step S555; No), the variable display effect process is terminated.

  If the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by super reach in step S555 (step S555; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined operation effect period (step S556). The operation effect period may be determined in advance as a period for executing the operation effect, for example, by an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern. If it is not the operation effect period in step S556 (step S556; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated.

  If it is the operation effect period in step S556 (step S556; Yes), a process for performing effect operation control according to which operation effect is executed is executed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, any one of operation effect A-1, operation effect A-2, operation effect B, operation effect C-1, and operation effect C-2. Can be selectively executed. Which operation effect is executed is determined in step SA06 in FIG.

  Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the operation effect A-1 is executed (step S557). When the operation effect A-1 is executed (step S557; Yes), the push button use reach effect process is executed (step S558), and the variable display effect process is ended. When it determines with not performing operation effect A-1 in step S557 (step S557; No), it is determined whether operation effect A-2 is performed (step S559). When the operation effect A-2 is executed (step S559; Yes), the continuous hit reach effect process is executed (step S560), and then the variable display effect process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S559 that the operation effect A-2 is not to be executed (step S559; No), it is determined whether or not the operation effect B is to be executed (step S561). When the operation effect B is executed (step S561; Yes), the tilt reach effect process is executed (step S562), and then the variable display effect process is ended. If it is determined in step S561 that the operation effect B is not to be executed (step S561; No), it is determined whether or not the operation effect C-1 is to be executed (step S563). When the operation effect C-1 is executed (step S563; Yes), the stick use reach effect process is executed (step S564), and then the variable display effect process is ended. When it is determined in step S563 that the operation effect C-1 is not to be executed (step S563; No), it is determined whether or not the operation effect C-2 is to be executed (step S565). When the operation effect C-2 is executed (step S565; Yes), the stick push combined reach effect process is executed (step S566), and then the variable display effect process is ended. If it is determined in step S565 that the operation effect C-2 is not to be executed (step S565; No), the variable display effect process is terminated. In addition, when it determines with not performing operation effect C-2 in step S565, since the operation effect which should be performed cannot be specified, a predetermined | prescribed error process is performed, for example, notification of abnormality occurrence Etc. may be performed.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect control process executed in step S553 of FIG. In the notice effect control process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is a predetermined notice effect period based on, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern corresponding to the notice effect (step SB01). ). The notice effect period may be set in advance as a period for executing the notice effect, for example, by an effect control pattern corresponding to the notice effect. If it is not the notice effect period in step SB01 (step SB01; No), the notice effect control process is terminated.

  If it is a notice effect period in step SB01 (step SB01; Yes), it is determined whether it is a predetermined operation detection period (step SB02). The operation detection period here is a period for detecting a player's instruction operation (push-down operation) on the push button 31B and an instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 35A of the stick controller 30, for example, corresponding to a notice effect. What is necessary is just to be predetermined by the production | presentation control pattern etc. which were performed.

  When it is the operation detection period in step SB02 (step SB02; Yes), for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern, effect operation control for executing the operation promotion effect is performed (step SB03). Thereafter, based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the push sensor 35B, it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B has been detected (step SB04). At this time, if there is no instruction operation (push-down operation) for the push button 31B (step SB04; No), the instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A is performed based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A. It is determined whether or not there is a detection (step SB05). When the instruction operation for the trigger button 31A is not detected (step SB05; No), for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern, the effect operation control is performed during the operation detection period (step SB06), and the notice effect control process is performed. Exit.

  When it is determined in step SB04 that an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B has been detected (step SB04; Yes), for example, 1 is added to the push operation history buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. For example, the push operation history value is updated by 1 (step SB07). When it is determined in step SB05 that the instruction operation (push / pull operation) for the trigger button 31A has been detected (step SB05; Yes), for example, 1 is added to the trigger operation history buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As a result, the trigger operation history value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step SB08).

  After performing either of the processes of Steps SB07 and SB08, setting for starting the rendering operation at the time of detecting the operation is performed (Step SB09). As an example, in the process of step SB09, various commands created in accordance with effect control execution data (for example, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.) read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the notice effect are displayed. It is only necessary that an effect operation for notifying a message that is a notification content at the time of the operation in the notice effect is performed by transmitting to the unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. At this time, after the operation detection period set by the effect control pattern or the like is ended (step SB10), the notice effect control process may be ended.

  If it is not the operation detection period in step SB02 (step SB02; No), for example, after performing the effect operation control after the end of the detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern (step SB11), the notice effect control The process ends.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit confirmation effect control process executed in step S554 of FIG. In the jackpot decision effect control process shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 120 executes various processes for performing the effect operation control according to which jackpot decision effect is executed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, any one of the jackpot finalizing effects SP1 to the jackpot finalizing effects SP4 can be selectively executed. Which jackpot finalizing effect is executed is determined in step SA16 in FIG.

  In the jackpot finalizing effect control process shown in FIG. 43, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit finalizing effect SP1 is executed (step SB21). When the big hit finalizing effect SP1 is executed (step SB21; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is at the time of starting symbol variation at which variable display such as decorative symbols is started (step SB22). In step SB22, when it is not at the time of starting the symbol variation (step SB22; No), the big hit determination effect control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step SB21 that the jackpot finalizing effect SP1 is not to be executed (step SB21; No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot finalizing effect SP2 is to be executed (step SB23). When the big hit finalizing effect SP2 is to be executed (step SB23; Yes), it is determined whether or not a reach is established when the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state (step SB24). If it is not at the time of reach establishment in step SB24 (step SB24; No), the big hit determination effect control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step SB23 that the jackpot finalizing effect SP2 is not to be executed (step SB23; No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot finalizing effect SP3 is to be executed (step SB25). When the big hit determination effect SP3 is executed (step SB25; Yes), the first operation detection in which the first instruction operation to the operation rod 30A, the trigger button 31A, or the push button 31B of the stick controller 30 is detected in the operation effect or the like. It is determined whether it is time (step SB26). If it is not at the time of detecting the first operation in step SB26 (step SB26; No), the big hit determination effect control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step SB25 that the jackpot finalizing effect SP3 is not to be executed (step SB25; No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot finalizing effect SP4 is to be executed (step SB27). When the jackpot finalizing effect SP4 is executed (step SB27; Yes), the achievement effect is executed when the achievement effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is “big hit” based on the operation detection in the operation effect or the like. It is determined whether or not there is (step SB28). If it is determined in step SB27 that the jackpot finalizing effect SP4 is not to be executed (step SB27; No), or if it is not in the achievement stage executing in step SB28 (step SB28; No), the jackpot finalizing effect control process is performed. finish.

  When it is time to start symbol variation at step SB22 (step SB22; Yes), when reach is established at step SB24 (step SB24; Yes), or when the first operation is detected at step SB26 (step SB26). ; Yes), or when the achievement effect is being executed in step SB28 (step SB28; Yes), for example, after performing the effect operation control for executing the jackpot finalizing effect based on the setting in the effect control pattern, etc. (Step SB29), the jackpot finalizing effect control process is terminated.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the push button use reach effect process executed in step S558 of FIG. 41 corresponding to the case where the operation effect A-1 is executed. In the push button use reach effect process shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is an operation explanation period based on, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the operation effect A-1. Is determined (step SC01). Then, when it is the operation explanation period (step SC01; Yes), after control of the production operation serving as the operation explanation production is performed (step SC02), the push button use reach production process is ended. As an example, in the process of step SC02, the display image specified by the display control data read from the effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Control of the rendering operation in the operation explanation effect such as displaying in the display area of the device 5 may be performed.

  If it is not the operation explanation period in step SC01 (step SC01; No), it is determined whether or not it is a press detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern (step SC03). The pressing detection period here may be a period in which one instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B is effectively detected as a single-shot operation. In this pressing detection period, not only one instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B but also one instruction operation (pushing operation) for the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 is effective as a single shot operation. It is sufficient if it can be detected.

  If it is the pressing detection period in step SC03 (step SC03; Yes), it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 35B has been detected based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the push sensor 35B. (Step SC04). At this time, if the instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 35B is not detected (step SC04; No), the instruction operation (push / pull operation) for the trigger button 31A based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A. ) Is detected (step SC05).

  If no instruction operation (push / pull operation) for the trigger button 31A is detected in step SC05 (step SC05; No), for example, after performing the effect operation control during the press detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern. (Step SC06), the push button use reach effect process is terminated. Here, in the process of step SC06, the blowing vibration control for executing the blowing vibration effect is not performed. That is, when the operation effect A-1 using the push button 31B is executed, the instruction operation is effectively detected even when the instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B is in the pressing detection period during which the operation is effectively detected. The fan vibration effect for causing the player to recognize this is not executed.

  When it is determined in step SC04 that the instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B has been detected (step SC04; Yes), for example, 1 is added to the push operation history buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. For example, the push operation history value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step SSC07). When it is determined in step SC05 that an instruction operation (push / pull operation) for the trigger button 31A has been detected (step SC05; YEs), for example, 1 is added to the trigger operation history buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As a result, the trigger operation history value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step SC08).

  After executing either of the processes of steps SC07 and SC08, the presence / absence of a hit is determined based on, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern (step SC09). As an example, when the variable display result is `` losing '', it is always determined that there is no hit, while when the variable display result is `` big hit '', it is always determined that there is a hit. It is only necessary to select or set an effect control pattern. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in step SC09 (step SC10).

  When it is determined in step SC10 that there is a hit (step SC10; Yes), an effect for executing the achievement effect for notifying that the variable display result is “big hit” based on the setting in the effect control pattern and the like. Operation control is performed (step SC11). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hit in step SC10 (step SC10; No), the non-delivery effect that does not notify that the variable display result is “big hit” based on the setting in the effect control pattern and the like. The production operation control for executing is performed (step SC12).

  After executing one of the processes of steps SC11 and SC12, the push button use reach effect process is ended after the press detection period set by the effect control pattern or the like is ended (step SC13).

  If it is not the press detection period in step SC03 (step SC03; No), for example, after performing the effect operation control after the end of the detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern (step SC14), the push button is used. The reach production process ends.

  FIG. 45 shows an effect display example in the operation effect A-1. In this effect display example, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), for example, the same decorative symbols are gathered and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C (stop display temporarily). As a result, the variable display state becomes the reach state. Subsequently, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), after the decorative design is reduced and displayed on the upper left part of the display area, a message corresponding to the start of the operation effect A-1 such as “Roulette chance!” Is displayed. An effect image for notification is displayed. This effect image only needs to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by the effect operation control by the process of step SC02 shown in FIG. 44, for example.

  After displaying the effect image shown in FIG. 45 (B), the instruction operation for the push button 31B is performed once, for example, by displaying the effect image as shown in FIG. 45 (C) in the process of step SC02. An effect operation that prompts a single-shot operation that is a (pressing operation) may be executed as an operation explanation effect. Then, for example, accompanying the display of the effect image as shown in FIG. 45D, it becomes a press detection period for effectively detecting the instruction operation (press operation) for the push button 31B (step SC03 in FIG. 44; Yes). . In the pressing detection period, not only an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B but also an instruction operation (pushing operation) for the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 is effectively detected.

  When the player performs an instruction operation (press operation) on the push button 31B in the press detection period corresponding to the operation effect A-1, it is determined in step SC04 in FIG. 44 that there is an operation on the push button 31B. Thus, the push operation history value is incremented by 1 in step SC07. On the other hand, when the player performs an instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A during the pressing operation period, it is determined in step SC05 in FIG. 44 that there is an operation on the trigger button 31A. At SC08, 1 is added to the trigger operation history value. At this time, if it is determined that there is a hit in steps SC09 and SC10 in FIG. 44, the achievement effect is displayed in the process of step SC11, for example, by displaying an effect image as shown in FIG. It is only necessary to control the execution of the production operation.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the continuous hit reach effect process executed in step 560 of FIG. 41 corresponding to the case where the operation effect A-2 is executed. In the continuous hit reach effect process shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the operation explanation period based on the setting in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the operation effect A-2, for example. Determination is made (step SD01). Then, when it is the operation explanation period (step SD01; Yes), after controlling the production operation as the operation explanation production (step SD02), the continuous hit reach production process is ended.

  If it is not the operation explanation period in step SD01 (step SD01; No), it is determined whether or not it is a pressing detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern (step SD03). The pressing detection period here may be a period in which a plurality of instruction operations (pressing operations) on the push button 31B are effectively detected as a continuous shooting operation. In this pressing detection period, not only a plurality of instruction operations (pressing operation) for the push button 31B but also a plurality of instruction operations (pushing operation) for the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 are effective as a continuous shooting operation. What is necessary is just to be able to detect.

  If it is the pressing detection period in step SD03 (step SD03; Yes), it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 35B has been detected based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the push sensor 35B. (Step SD04). At this time, if the instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 35B is not detected (step SD04; No), the instruction operation (push / pull operation) for the trigger button 31A based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A. ) Is detected (step SD05).

  When it is determined in step SD04 that an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B has been detected (step SD04; Yes), for example, a push operation flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is set to an on state. (Step SD06). When the push operation flag is already on, the process of step SD06 may be skipped. Further, if the trigger operation flag is on when the process of step SD06 is executed, the trigger operation flag may be cleared to be in the off state.

  When it is determined in step SD05 that an instruction operation (push / pull operation) for the trigger button 31A has been detected (step SD05; Yes), for example, a trigger operation flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is set to an on state. (Step SD07). If the trigger operation flag is already on, the process of step SD07 may be skipped. If the push operation flag is on when the process of step SD07 is performed, the push operation flag may be cleared to be in the off state.

  After performing either of the processes of steps SD06 and SD07, the presence / absence of a hit is determined based on, for example, settings in the effect control pattern (step SD08). As an example, when the variable display result is “losing”, it is only necessary to always determine that there is no hit. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, if the number of times that the operation is determined in the process of step SD04 or step SD05 is less than a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the determination of no hit is made. In other words, the hit determination may be performed when the number of times determined to be an operation reaches a predetermined number. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in step SD08 (step SD09).

  When it is determined that there is a hit in step SD09 (step SD09; Yes), an effect for executing the achievement effect for notifying that the variable display result is “big hit” based on the setting in the effect control pattern and the like Operation control is performed (step SD10).

  When no instruction operation (push / pull operation) is detected for the trigger button 31A in step SD05 (step SD05; No), or when it is determined that there is no hit in step SD09 (step SD09; No), for example, an effect control pattern Based on the setting in step S11, it is determined whether or not the non-delivery effect timing, which is the timing for starting execution of the non-delivery effect, has been reached (step SD11).

  When it is the non-delivery effect timing in step SD11 (step SD11; Yes), for executing the non-delivery effect that does not notify that the variable display result becomes “big hit” based on the setting in the effect control pattern. Production operation control is performed (step SD12).

  After executing one of the processes of steps SD10 and SD12, the pressing detection period set by the effect control pattern or the like is ended (step SD13). At this time, it is determined whether or not the push operation flag is on (step SD14). When the push operation flag is on (step SD14; Yes), after the push operation flag is cleared and turned off (step SD15), the push operation history value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step SD16). The continuous hit reach production process is terminated.

  When the push operation flag is off in step SD14 (step SD14; No), it is determined whether or not the trigger operation flag is on (step SD17). At this time, if the trigger operation flag is off (step SD17; No), the continuous hit reach effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when the trigger operation flag is on (step SD17; Yes), after the trigger operation flag is cleared and turned off (step SD18), the trigger operation history value is updated to be incremented by one. (Step SD19), the continuous hit reach effect process is terminated.

  When it is not the non-delivery effect timing in Step SD11 (Step SD11; No), for example, after performing the effect operation control during the press detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern (Step SD20), the continuous hit reach effect process Exit. Here, in the process of step SD20, the blowing vibration control for executing the blowing vibration effect is not performed. That is, when the operation effect A-2 using the push button 31B is executed, the instruction operation is effectively detected even when the instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B is in the pressing detection period during which the operation is effectively detected. The fan vibration effect for causing the player to recognize this is not executed.

  As an example, in the process of step SD20, when it is determined that there is no hit in step SD09, the display of the effect image corresponding to no hit based on the determination that there is an operation in the process of step SD04 or step SD05 It is only necessary to perform effect operation control corresponding to the absence of hit, such as display of an effect image in which a bow and arrow released by the character is off the target.

  If it is not the pressing detection period in step SD03 (step SD03; No), for example, after performing the effect operation control after the end of the detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern (step SD21), continuous hit reach effect The process ends.

  FIG. 47 shows an example of effect display in the operation effect A-2. In this effect display example, for example, as shown in FIG. 47A, the variable display state becomes the reach state, and for example, as shown in FIG. 47B, the decorative design is reduced and the upper left of the display area is displayed. An effect image for informing a message corresponding to the start of the operation effect A-2 such as “Roulette Chance!” Is displayed. The effect image may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by the effect operation control by the process of step SD02 shown in FIG. 46, for example.

  After displaying the effect image shown in FIG. 47 (B), the instruction operation for the push button 31B is performed a plurality of times, for example, by displaying the effect image as shown in FIG. 47 (C) in the process of step SD02. An effect operation that prompts a continuous operation that is a (pressing operation) may be executed as an operation explanation effect. Thereafter, it becomes a pressing detection period during which an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B is effectively detected (step SD03 in FIG. 46; Yes). In the pressing detection period, not only an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B but also an instruction operation (pushing operation) for the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 is effectively detected.

  When the player performs an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B during the pressing operation period corresponding to the operation effect A-2, it is determined that there is an operation on the push button 31B in step SD04 of FIG. Thus, in step SD06, the push operation flag is set to the on state. On the other hand, when the player performs an instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A during the press detection period, it is determined in step SD05 in FIG. 46 that there is an operation on the trigger button 31A. In SD07, the trigger operation flag is set to the on state. At this time, every time it is determined that there is an operation in step SD04 or step SD05, if it is determined that there is no hit in steps SD08 or SD09, the process proceeds to step SD20 until the non-delivery effect timing is reached in step SD11. For example, as shown in FIG. 47D, an effect image may be displayed so that the bow and arrow emitted by the character deviates from the target. If it is determined that there is a hit in steps SD08 and SD09 in FIG. 46, an achievement effect is obtained by displaying the effect image as shown in FIG. 47 (E) in the process of step SD10. It is only necessary to control the execution of the rendering operation.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the tilt reach effect process executed in step S562 of FIG. 41 corresponding to the case where the operation effect B is executed. In the tilt reach effect process shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the operation explanation period based on the setting in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the operation effect B, for example. (Step SC21). Then, when it is the operation explanation period (step SC21; Yes), the control of the rendering operation serving as the operation explanation effect is performed (step SC22).

  Following the process of step SC22, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern, it is determined whether or not the operation explanation period has elapsed (step SC23). When the operation explanation period has not elapsed (step SC23; No), the tilt reach effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when the operation explanation period elapses (step SC23; Yes), the initial value in the effect update determination value is set based on the setting in the effect control pattern (step SC24). The effect update determination value determines whether or not the number of instruction operations (tilting operations) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 has reached a predetermined number of times. ) Is used in the process of step SC32 to be described later as a determination value for changing. After executing the process of step SC24, the tilt operation count initial value is set (step SC25), and the tilt reach effect process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step SC25, if the tilt operation counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like is cleared, the stored tilt operation count value is set to the initial value “0”. Good.

  If it is not the operation explanation period in step SC21 (step SC21; No), it is determined whether or not it is the tilt detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern (step SC26). The tilt detection period here may be a period for effectively detecting a plurality of instruction operations (tilt operations) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30.

  When it is the tilt detection period in step SC26 (step SC26; Yes), detection of an instruction operation (tilt operation in an arbitrary direction) for the operating rod 30A based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the tilt direction sensor unit 32 or the like. Is determined (step SC27). At this time, if an instruction operation (tilting operation) is detected for the operating rod 30A (step SC27; Yes), for example, the stored operation is performed by reading the stored information in the tilting direction buffer of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The direction is read (step SC28). Information indicating the direction of the tilting operation with respect to the detected operating rod 30A may be stored in the tilting direction buffer in the process of step SC30 described later.

  Following the processing of step SC28, it is determined whether or not a tilting operation in the same direction has been detected, for example, by comparing the tilting direction detected in step SC27 with the tilting direction read in step SC28. Step SC29). At this time, if the detected direction of the tilting operation is different (step SC29; No), the direction of the tilting operation detected in step SC27 is stored (step SC30). As an example, in the process of step SC30, information indicating that the direction of the detected tilting operation can be specified may be stored in the tilting direction buffer to store the direction of the tilting operation. Further, for example, the tilt operation count value, which is a stored value of the tilt operation counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is updated so as to add 1 (step SC31).

  Following the process of step SC31, it is determined whether or not the tilt operation count value has reached the effect update determination value (step SC32). If the tilt operation count value has not reached the effect update determination value (step SC32; No), the tilt reach effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when the tilt operation count value reaches the effect update determination value (step SC32; Yes), effect operation control for updating the effect operation during the tilt detection period is performed (step SC33). As an example, in the process of step SC33, in the effect image indicating the power bar displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, the scale display may be updated so as to increase so as to indicate an increase in power.

  After executing the process of step SC33, after setting a new effect update determination value (step SC34), the tilt reach effect process is terminated. The effect update determination value set in step SC34 is based on the setting in the effect control pattern, for example, whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”, and the effect after the update by the process in step SC33. What is necessary is just to set to a different value according to the aspect (effect content), the timing at which the rendering operation is updated by the process of step SC33, or a part or all of these. As an example, when the variable display result is “losing”, it is difficult to update the production operation by setting a larger value as the production update determination value than when the variable display result is “big hit”. It may be set as follows.

  When it is determined in step SC27 that no tilting operation is detected (step SC27; No), or when it is determined in step SC29 that the direction of the tilting operation is the same (step SC29; Yes), the tilt detection period. After performing the production effect control in the middle (step SC35), the tilt reach production process is terminated.

  In the processing of step SC33 and step SC35, blower vibration control for executing the blower vibration effect is performed. That is, when the operation effect B using the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is executed, when the instruction operation is performed during the tilt detection period in which the instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation rod 30A is effectively detected. The fan vibration effect that allows the player to recognize only at the same time is executed.

  If it is not the tilt detection period in step S26 (step SC26; No), it is determined whether or not the tilt operation count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined achievement determination value (step SC36). The achievement determination value may be set to a different value depending on whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit” based on the setting in the effect control pattern. As an example, when the variable display result is “losing”, it is sufficient to always make a determination that is less than the achievement determination value. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, for example, the achievement determination value is set to “10”, and the tilt operation count value may be easily equal to or greater than the achievement determination value.

  When the tilt operation count value is greater than or equal to the achievement determination value in step SC36 (step SC36; Yes), an achievement effect that notifies that the variable display result is “big hit” based on the setting in the effect control pattern and the like. After performing the production operation control for execution (step SC37), the tilt reach production process is terminated. On the other hand, when the tilt operation count value is less than the achievement determination value (step SC36; No), the non-delivery that does not notify that the variable display result is “big hit” based on the setting in the effect control pattern and the like. After performing the effect operation control for executing the effect (step SC38), the tilt reach effect process is terminated.

  FIG. 49 shows an effect display example in the operation effect B. In this effect display example, first, for example, as shown in FIG. 49A, the variable display state is changed to the reach state, and for example, as shown in FIG. Is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and then an effect image notifying a message corresponding to the start of the operation effect B such as “Tug of war opportunity!” Is displayed. The effect image may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by the effect operation control by the process of step SC22 shown in FIG. 48, for example.

  After the effect image shown in FIG. 49 (B) is displayed, the instruction to the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is displayed by, for example, displaying the effect image as shown in FIG. 49 (C) in the process of step SC22. An effect operation that prompts an operation (tilting operation) may be executed as an operation explanation effect. After that, it becomes a tilt detection period during which an instruction operation (tilt operation) for the operating rod 30A is effectively detected (step SC26 in FIG. 48; Yes).

  When the player performs an instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation rod 30A during the tilt detection period corresponding to the operation effect B, it is determined that there is an operation on the operation rod 30A in step SC27 of FIG. When it is determined in step SC29 that the direction of the tilt operation is different, the tilt operation count value is incremented by 1 in step SC31. At this time, whenever it is determined in step SC32 that the tilt operation count value has reached the effect update determination value, the effect mode (effect contents) is updated in step SC33, for example, as shown in FIG. In addition, it is only necessary to display an effect image in which two characters perform a tug of war. Further, when it is determined in step SC26 that it is not the tilt detection period, if the tilt operation count value is equal to or greater than the achievement determination value in step SC36, for example, as shown in FIG. It is only necessary to control the execution of the effect operation as the achievement effect by displaying such an effect image.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the stick use reach effect process executed in step S564 of FIG. 41 in correspondence with the case where the operation effect C-1 is executed. In the stick use reach effect process shown in FIG. 50, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the operation explanation period based on the setting in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the operation effect C-1, for example. Is determined (step SC51). Then, when it is the operation explanation period (step SC51; Yes), an effect operation that is an operation explanation effect is controlled (step SC52).

  Following the processing of step SC52, it is determined whether or not the operation explanation period has elapsed (step SC53) based on, for example, settings in the effect control pattern. When the operation explanation period has not elapsed (step SC53; No), the stick use reach effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when the operation explanation period elapses (step SC53; Yes), after setting for displaying the operation target at the initial position (step SC54), the stick use reach effect process is ended. In the process of step SC54, for example, display coordinates are set in order to display a predetermined effect image to be operated at the operation target initial position determined by the process of step SA12 shown in FIG.

  When it is not the operation explanation period in step SC51 (step SC51; No), it is determined whether or not it is the tilt detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern (step SC55). If it is the tilt detection period (step SC55; Yes), has an instruction operation (tilt operation) detected on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the tilt direction sensor unit 32 or the like? It is determined whether or not (step SC56). At this time, if there is detection of an instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operating rod 30A (step SC56; Yes), the rendering operation update control for changing the rendering mode (production content) according to the detected direction of the tilting operation. (Step SC57). As an example, in the process of step SC57, according to the direction of the tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A, a predetermined effect image (for example, an effect image showing an aim) to be operated is moved in the display area of the image display device 5, The effect image including the background image may be scroll-displayed.

  If it is determined in step SC56 that no tilting operation has been detected (step SC56; No), or after the processing of step SC57 is executed, is it a push / pull detection period based on settings in the production control pattern, etc. It is determined whether or not (step SC58). The push-pull detection period is a period during which a player's instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 is detected effectively.

  The push-pull detection period may be started after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the tilt operation period based on the setting in the effect control pattern. FIG. 51 shows a setting example of the operation explanation period, the tilt detection period, and the push / pull detection period. In this embodiment, when the operation effect C-1 is started, it is first an operation explanation period. At this time, both the instruction operation (tilting operation) for the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A are invalid (detection prohibited). Then, when the timing T1 at which the operation explanation period ends is reached, a tilt detection period is subsequently started, and as shown in FIG. 51A, an instruction operation (tilt operation) for the operating rod 30A can be detected effectively. become able to. That is, the timing T1 is the end timing of the operation explanation period and the start timing of the tilt operation period. Even when the tilt operation period start timing T1 is reached, the push-pull detection period is not yet started, and the instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A is invalid (detection prohibited). Thereafter, when a predetermined time set by the production control pattern elapses and the timing T2 is reached, a push / pull detection period is started, and as shown in FIG. ) Can also be detected effectively. That is, the timing T2 that comes after the start timing T1 of the tilt operation period is the start timing of the push-pull detection period.

  If it is not the push / pull detection period in step SC58 (step SC58; No), the effect operation control before the push / pull detection period is performed (step SC59), and then the stick use reach effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is the push / pull detection period (step SC58; Yes), whether or not an instruction operation (push / pull operation) for the trigger button 31A has been detected based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A or the like. Is determined (step SC60). At this time, if the instruction operation (push / pull operation) for the trigger button 31A is not detected (step SC60; No), the effect operation control during the push / pull detection period is performed (step SC61), and then the stick use reach effect process is performed. finish.

  In the processing of step SC57, step SC59, and step SC61, blower vibration control for executing the blower vibration effect is performed. That is, when the operation effect C-1 using the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 or the trigger button 31A is executed, a tilt detection period in which at least an instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation rod 30A is effectively detected is started. Later, only when an instruction operation is performed on the operation rod 30A or the trigger button 31A, a ventilation vibration effect that can be recognized by the player is executed.

  When an instruction operation (push / pull operation) for the trigger button 31A is detected in step SC60 (step SC60; Yes), the presence / absence of a hit is determined based on, for example, settings in the effect control pattern (step SC62). As an example, when the variable display result is “losing”, it is only necessary to always determine that there is no hit. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is sufficient to always determine that there is a hit. Alternatively, even if the variable display result is “big hit”, it may be determined that there is no hit. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in step SC62 (step SC63).

  When it is determined in step SC63 that there is a hit (step SC63; Yes), an effect for executing the achievement effect for notifying that the variable display result is “big hit” based on the setting in the effect control pattern and the like. Operation control is performed (step SC64). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hit in step SC63 (step SC63; No), the non-delivery effect that does not notify that the variable display result is “big hit” based on the setting in the effect control pattern and the like. Effect operation control is executed (step SC65).

  After executing one of the processes of steps SC64 and SC65, the tilt detection period and the push / pull detection period set by the effect control pattern or the like are ended (step SC66), and then the stick use reach effect process is ended.

  If it is not the tilt detection period in step SC55 (step SC55; No), for example, after performing the effect operation control outside the detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern (step SC67), the stick use reach effect is performed. The process ends.

  FIG. 52 shows an example of effect display in the operation effect C-1. In this effect display example, for example, as shown in FIG. 52A, the variable display state becomes the reach state, and, for example, as shown in FIG. 52B, the decorative design is reduced and the lower left corner of the display area is displayed. Displayed on the screen. At this time, in the process of step SC52 shown in FIG. 50, for example, an effect image is displayed according to the effect control pattern. An effect operation that prompts a single-shot operation that is a single instruction operation (push-pull operation) may be executed as an operation explanation effect. When the operation explanation period ends, an effect image representing an aim as shown in FIG. 52C, for example, as a predetermined effect image to be operated is obtained as an operation effect C-1 by the process of step SC54 shown in FIG. Is displayed at the initial position determined in accordance with the execution of. First, the tilt detection period is reached (step SC55 in FIG. 50; Yes), and the instruction operation (tilt operation) for the operation rod 30A is validated.

  When the player performs an instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation rod 30A in the tilt detection period corresponding to the operation effect C-1, it is determined that there is a tilt operation on the operation rod 30A in step SC56 of FIG. Thus, in step SC57, control for updating the rendering operation is performed in accordance with the operation direction of the operating rod 30A. Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG. 52D, the display position of the effect image representing the aim can be moved in accordance with the tilting operation of the operating rod 30A. For example, as shown in FIG. 52E, when the display position of the effect image representing the aim matches the display position of the effect image representing the enemy aircraft, the display mode of the effect image representing the aim captures the enemy aircraft. What is necessary is just to become a specific display mode (for example, a display mode in which the display color of the aim is red and the brightness is increased) corresponding to the above.

  After the tilt detection period corresponding to the operation effect C-1 is started, a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, and then the push / pull detection period starts (step S58 in FIG. 50; Yes), and the trigger button of the stick controller 30 is displayed. The instruction operation (push-pull operation) for 31A is validated. When the player performs an instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A during this push-pull detection period, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (F), an effect image in which a shell is fired is displayed. If it is determined in step S60 in FIG. 50 that there is an operation on the trigger button 31A, for example, if it is determined in step SC61 or SC62 that there is a hit, the process in step SC64, for example, FIG. It is only necessary to control the execution of the effect operation as the achievement effect by displaying the effect image that has been successfully shot down by the enemy aircraft as shown in 52 (G).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the stick push combined use reach effect process executed in step S566 of FIG. 41 corresponding to the case where the operation effect C-2 is executed. In the stick push combined use reach effect process shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 120 first performs the same stick use reach effect process as when the operation effect C-1 is executed (step SC81). Even if the stick use reach effect process similar to the case where the operation effect C-1 is executed is performed, the effect mode (effect content) in the operation effect C-2 is changed to the operation effect by the setting in the effect control pattern. What is necessary is just to be able to differ from the production | generation aspect (production content) in C-1.

  After the stick use reach effect process is executed in step SC81, it is determined whether or not it is the press detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern (step SC82). Here, the pressing detection period may be started after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the pressing and pulling detection period is started based on the setting in the effect control pattern. FIG. 54 shows a setting example of an operation explanation period, a tilt detection period, a push / pull detection period, and further a press detection period. In the setting example shown in FIG. 54, until the start timing T2 of the push-pull detection period is reached, after the tilt operation period is started following the end of the operation explanation period, the predetermined operation period is the same as in the setting example shown in FIG. After the time has elapsed, the push / pull detection period is started. On the other hand, even if the start timing T2 of the push / pull detection period is reached, the press detection period is not yet started, and the instruction operation (press operation) for the push button 31B is invalid (detection prohibited). Thereafter, when the predetermined time set by the production control pattern elapses and the timing T3 is reached, a pressing detection period is started, and an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B is also performed as shown in FIG. It becomes possible to detect effectively. That is, the timing T3 that comes after the start timing T2 of the push / pull detection period is the start timing of the press detection period.

  The start timing T2 of the push / pull detection period and the start timing T3 of the press detection period may be set to the same timing so that the press detection period starts simultaneously with the start of the push / pull detection period. Alternatively, when there is no instruction operation (tilt operation) for the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 during the tilt detection period, or when there is no instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A during the push-pull detection period, The detection period may not be started. That is, in the press detection period, there is an instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 in the tilt detection period, or an instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A in the push-pull detection period. You may make it start on the condition of either one or both among things. Thereby, when the operation effect C-2 is executed, when there is no instruction operation (tilting operation) for the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30, or when there is no instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A, the operation is performed. An effect operation unique to the effect C-2 may not be executed, and only an effect operation common to the pre-reading effect of the operation effect C-1 may be executed.

  After the pressing detection period corresponding to the operation effect C-2 is started, when an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B is detected, only the pressing detection period is displayed as shown by a broken line in FIG. It is possible to end the tilt detection period and the push / pull detection period. After the effect operation control for executing the achievement effect in the stick use reach effect process in step SC81 (step SC64 in FIG. 50) is performed, control is performed so that the pressing detection period does not occur, and the variable display result is displayed. You may make it not alert | report twice that it becomes a "hit".

  If it is not the pressing detection period in step SC82 (step SC82; No), the stick push combined use reach effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is a press detection period (step SC82; Yes), the presentation operation control for executing the push promotion effect is performed (step SC83). The push promotion effect only needs to include an effect operation that prompts the user to act on the push button 31 </ b> B, for example, by the same effect mode (effect content) as the operation promotion effect in the case of executing “pre-operation notice”. Thereafter, based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the push sensor 35B, it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B has been detected (step SC84). At this time, if there is no instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B (step SC84; No), the stick push combined use pre-reading effect process is terminated.

  When an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B is detected in step SC84 (step SC84; Yes), a predetermined effect image (for example, an effect image showing an aim) to be operated is enlarged. Control for updating the effect operation is performed (step SC85). At this time, after the pressing detection period is ended (step SC86), the stick push combined use reach effect processing is ended.

  FIG. 55 shows an effect display example in the operation effect C-2. In this effect display example, for example, as shown in FIG. 55A, the variable display state becomes the reach state, and for example, as shown in FIG. 55B, the decorative design is reduced and the lower left corner of the display area is displayed. Displayed on the screen. At this time, an instruction operation (tilting operation) for the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 or a single instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A is performed by displaying an effect image according to the effect control pattern. An effect operation that prompts a single shot operation may be executed as an operation explanation effect. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 55C and 55D, it is only necessary to display effect images similar to FIGS. 52C and 52D corresponding to the operation effect C-1.

  Thereafter, a pressing detection period is entered (step S82 in FIG. 53; Yes), and an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B is validated. At this time, in the process of step SC83, effect operation control for executing the push promotion effect is performed, for example, by displaying an effect image as shown in FIG. When the player performs an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B during this pressing detection period, in the process of step SC85 in FIG. 53, for example, from the effect image shown in FIG. 55 (F) to FIG. Furthermore, control to change to the effect image shown in FIG. 55 (H) is performed, and the effect image representing the aim is enlarged and displayed.

  When the player performs an instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A during the push-pull detection period corresponding to the operation effect C-2, for example, as shown in FIG. The effect image is displayed. For example, if it is determined that there is a hit in the stick use reach effect process executed in step SC81 in FIG. 53, for example, an effect image in which the enemy aircraft has been successfully shot down as shown in FIG. It is only necessary to control the execution of the effect operation as the achievement effect by the display or the like.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display stop process executed in step S173 of FIG. In the variable display stop process shown in FIG. 56, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a symbol fixed display flag provided in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S571). Here, the symbol confirmation display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S575 described later based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like.

  When the symbol determination display flag is OFF in step S571 (step S571; No), it is determined whether or not a symbol determination designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S572). At this time, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not received (step S572; No), the variable display stop process is ended, and the computer waits until the symbol confirmation designation command is received. When a predetermined time has passed without receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred in command transmission / reception, and predetermined error processing may be executed.

  If a symbol confirmation designation command is received in step S572 (step S572; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, thereby variably displaying decorative symbols. A final stop symbol as a definite decorative symbol as a result is derived and displayed (step S573). Further, a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) set in advance as the symbol fixed display time is set (step S574). Then, after the symbol fixed display flag is set to the on state (step S575), the variable display stop process is ended. Thus, after the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S573, variable display is stopped in the effect control process according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt until the symbol fixed display time set in step S574 elapses. Each time the process is executed, it is determined in step S571 that the symbol confirmation display flag is on.

  When the symbol determination display flag is ON in step S571 (step S571; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination display time has elapsed (step S576). At this time, if the symbol fixed display time has not elapsed (step S576; No), the variable display stop process is terminated to wait until the symbol fixed display time has elapsed.

  When the symbol fixed display time has elapsed in step S576 (step S576; Yes), the symbol fixed display flag is cleared and turned off (step S577). At this time, the operation item change setting process is executed, and the operation item is set to be changeable based on the operation history for the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B (step S578). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” (step S579). When the variable display result is not “big hit” but “losing” (step S579; No), the production process flag is cleared to initialize the value to “0” (step S580), and then variable. The display stop process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S579 that the variable display result is “big hit” (step S579; Yes), it is determined whether or not a big hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S581). At this time, if the jackpot start designation command is not received (step S581; No), the variable display stop process is terminated to wait until the jackpot start designation command is received. When a predetermined time elapses without receiving the jackpot start designation command, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred in transmission / reception of the command, and predetermined error processing may be executed.

  When the big hit start designation command is received in step S581 (step S581; Yes), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” corresponding to the big hit display process (step S582). The variable display stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation item change setting process executed in step S578 of FIG. In the operation item change setting process shown in FIG. 57, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the difference between the operation history values (step SE01). As an example, in the process of step SE01, the trigger operation history value specified as the trigger operation history buffer value is compared with the push operation history value specified as the push operation history buffer value, and these differences are specified.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the operation item needs to be changed based on the difference specified in step SE01 (step SE02). As an example, in the process of step SE02, when the current operation item buffer value is “1” and the stick controller 30 is an operation item, the push operation history value is a predetermined value (for example, “ If it is larger than 5 ”or the like, it may be determined that the operation item buffer value needs to be changed to“ 2 ”. Further, when the current operation item buffer value is “2” and the push button 31B is an operation item, the trigger operation history value may be larger than the push operation history value by a predetermined value (for example, “5”) or more. For example, it may be determined that the operation item buffer value needs to be changed to “1”. Then, based on the determination result in step SE02, it is determined whether or not to change the operation item (step SE03).

  When it is determined in step SE03 that the operation item is not changed (step SE03; No), the operation item change setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined to change in step SE03 (step SE03; Yes), the operation item buffer value is updated (step SE04), and then the operation item change setting process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step SE04, settings for updating the operation item buffer value from “1” to “2”, settings for updating the operation item buffer value from “2” to “1”, and the like are performed. What should I do?

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit effect process executed in step S175 of FIG. In the jackpot effect processing shown in FIG. 58, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S591). At this time, if a jackpot end designation command is received (step S591; Yes), a setting is made to end the execution of the jackpot effect executed in response to the jackpot gaming state (step S592). Then, after updating the value of the effect process flag to “6” which is a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process (step S593), the big hit effect process is ended.

  If no jackpot end designation command is received in step S591 (step S591; No), it is determined whether or not a pre-reading effect is being executed (step S594). For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 is provided with a pre-reading effect flag that is set to an on state during execution of the pre-reading effect. In the process of step S594, the pre-reading effect flag is on. By determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is being executed, it may be determined.

  If the pre-reading effect is not being executed in step S594 (step S594; No), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect start timing has come (step S595). Here, the start timing of the pre-reading effect is, for example, the timing at which the number of round executions in the jackpot gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, “5”) or the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot gaming state for a predetermined time (for example, Any timing related to the progress of the game in the big hit gaming state, such as the timing of reaching 1 minute), may be set in advance.

  If it is the start timing of the prefetch effect in step S595 (step S595; Yes), the prefetch effect determination process is executed (step S596), and then the big hit effect process is terminated.

  If the prefetch effect is being executed in step S594 (step S594; Yes), is the prefetch effect type CS1 corresponding to the effect mode (effect content) in the prefetch effect? It is determined whether or not (step S597). In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, prefetching according to any of the prefetching effect type CS1 to the prefetching effect type CS3 corresponding to the effect content in the prefetching effect. Production can be performed. Which prefetching effect type is to be executed is determined in the prefetching effect determination process in step S596. When it is determined in step S597 that the type is the pre-reading effect type CS1 (step S597; Yes), the stick use pre-reading effect process is executed (step S598), and then the big hit effect process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S597 that it is not the prefetch effect type CS1 (step S597; No), it is determined whether or not it is the prefetch effect type CS2 (step S599). At this time, if it is determined that the pre-reading effect type CS2 is determined (step S599; Yes), the hitting pre-reading effect process is executed (step S600), and then the big hit effect process is terminated. When it is determined in step S599 that it is not the pre-reading effect type CS2 (step S599; No), the stick-push combined effect process is executed corresponding to the pre-reading effect type CS3 (step S601), and the big hit The production process ends.

  When it is determined in step S595 that it is not the start timing of the pre-reading effect (step S595; No), after setting the effect operation to be a big hit effect executed in the big hit gaming state (step S602) ), The big hit effect production process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S602, the effect control execution data may be read from the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the start of the big hit gaming state and the effect operation control according to the effect control execution data may be executed.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the prefetch effect determination process executed in step S596 of FIG. In the pre-reading effect determination process shown in FIG. 59, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the determination result storage number maximum value by, for example, reading the determination result storage count value (step S701). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified determination result storage number maximum value is greater than or equal to a predetermined prefetch effect executable value (for example, “1”) (step S702).

  When the determination result storage number maximum value is less than the prefetch effect executable value in step S702 (step S702; No), the prefetch effect determination process is terminated in response to not executing the prefetch effect. On the other hand, when the determination result storage number maximum value is equal to or greater than the prefetch effect executable value (step S702; Yes), the stored contents of the winning determination result buffer 200 are checked (step S703). For example, in the process of step S703, determination results stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 from the storage number “1” to the determination result storage number maximum value are sequentially read to determine “winning determination per winning time”. What is necessary is just to determine whether the determination result which shows a result and "within a specific pattern common range" is memorize | stored.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S703, the prefetch effect type determination table 140 is selected and set as a use table for determining any of the plurality of prefetch effect types (step S704). Further, numerical data indicating the random value SR1 for determining the pre-reading effect type is extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S705). Then, by referring to the prefetch effect type determination table 140 selected as the use table based on the random value SR1 extracted in step S705, the prefetch effect type including whether or not the prefetch effect is executed is included. Is determined (step S706). At this time, it is determined whether or not the result of determination in step S706 is that there is no prefetch effect that does not execute the prefetch effect (step S707).

  If it is determined in step S707 that there is no pre-reading effect (step S707; Yes), the pre-reading effect determination process is terminated in response to not performing the pre-reading effect. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect type CS1 is determined as one of the pre-reading effect type CS1 and the pre-reading effect type CS3 in Step S706 (Step S707; No), it is determined in Step S706. Whether or not the pre-reading effect type is the pre-reading effect type CS2 corresponding to the pre-reading effect that changes the effect mode (effect contents) according to the continuous operation (continuous hitting operation) using the push button 31B. Is determined (step S708).

  If the pre-reading effect type CS1 or the pre-reading effect type CS3 is determined in step S706 and it is not the pre-reading effect type CS2 (step S708; No), the variable display result in the pre-reading effect is “big hit”. The notification target initial position determination table 141 is selected and set as a use table for determining the initial position of the notification target to be notified of the possibility or the like (step S709). Further, numerical data indicating the random number value SR2 for determining the notification target initial position is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S710). Then, by referring to the notification target initial position determination table 141 selected as the use table based on the random value SR2 extracted in step S710, among the determination results stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 Then, the notification target initial storage number that is the storage number of the determination result that is the initial position of the notification target is determined (step S711).

  Following the processing of step S711, for example, a notification target storage number buffer value that is a stored value of the notification target storage number buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is set (step S712). For example, in the process of step S712, the notification target initial storage number determined in step S711 may be stored as the initial value of the notification target storage number buffer.

  When it is determined in step S708 that the pre-reading effect type is CS2 (step S708; Yes), the notification target selection pattern is used as a usage table for determining any of the plurality of patterns prepared in advance as the notification target selection pattern. The decision table 142 is selected and set (step S713). Also, numerical data indicating the random value SR3 for determining the notification target selection pattern is extracted from the random number circuit 124, the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, and the like (step S714). Then, based on the random value SR3 extracted in step S714 and the like, the notification target selection pattern to be used is determined by referring to the notification target selection pattern determination table 142 selected as the usage table (step S715). At this time, “1” is set as the initial value of the notification target storage number buffer (step S716).

  After performing either of the processes of steps S712 and S716, an effect control pattern to be used for executing the prefetch effect is selected (step S717). For example, in the process of step S717, an effect control pattern prepared in advance may be selected corresponding to the prefetched effect type determined by the process of step S706. Thereafter, after setting for starting the pre-reading effect is performed (step S718), the pre-reading effect determining process is ended. In the process of step S718, for example, display control commands designated by the display control data are transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and the display of the effect image in the prefetch effect is started. Various production operations may be started.

  60 and 61 are flowcharts showing an example of the stick use pre-reading effect process executed in step S598 of FIG. 58 in correspondence with the case where the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 is executed. In this stick use pre-reading effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the operation explanation period based on the setting in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the pre-reading effect type CS1, for example. (Step S731 in FIG. 60). Then, when it is the operation explanation period (step S731; Yes), after the control of the effect operation serving as the operation explanation effect is performed (step S732), the stick use effect process is ended. In the process of step S732, for example, a display control command designated by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, so that an effect image in the operation explanation effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. It is only necessary to control the rendering operation in the operation explanation effect.

  If it is not the operation explanation period in step S731 (step S731; No), it is determined whether or not it is a tilt detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern (step S733). The tilt detection period is a period during which the player's instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is effectively detected.

  If it is the tilt detection period in step S733 (step S733; Yes), the determination result storage number maximum value is specified (step S734). Then, for example, it is determined whether or not the notification target storage number specified from the notification target storage number buffer value has reached the determination result storage number maximum value specified in step S734 (step S735). Here, when the notification target storage number reaches the determination result storage number maximum value, the storage number is stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 as a target for notifying the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” in the pre-reading effect. The variable display corresponding to the determination result having the maximum determination result storage number is selected. That is, in the start winning memory display area 5H, the variable display corresponding to the rightmost display part (the last variable display held) among the display parts whose display colors are changed is selected as the notification target. Therefore, if the notification target storage number has reached the determination result storage number maximum value, there is no indication of variable display hold on the right display part in the start winning storage display area 5H, and the notification target is displayed on the right side. Moving to a hold (new hold) is restricted (prohibited).

  Therefore, only when the determination result storage number maximum value is not reached in step S735 (step S735; No), the tilting operation to the right is performed based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the tilting direction sensor unit 32. It is determined whether or not there is a detection (step S736). At this time, if a tilt operation is detected in the right direction (step S736; Yes), for example, 1 is added to the right tilt count value that is the stored value of the right tilt counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. (Step S737).

  Following the process of step S737, it is determined whether or not the rightward tilt count value has reached a target change determination value determined in advance by an effect control pattern or the like (step S738). At this time, if the target change determination value has been reached (step S738; Yes), the notification target storage number buffer value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S739). As a result, the variable display corresponding to the determination result having a larger storage number in the winning determination result buffer 200 is selected as a target for notifying the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” in the pre-reading effect.

  In the case where the rightward tilt operation is not detected in step S736 (step S736; No), or after the process of step S739 is executed, the count value is set to “0” by clearing the rightward tilt counter or the like. (Step S740).

  When the notification target storage number has reached the determination result storage number maximum value at step S735 (step S735; Yes), or when the rightward tilt count value has not reached the target change determination value at step S738 (step S738). No), or after executing the process of step S740, for example, it is determined whether or not the notification target storage number specified from the notification target storage number buffer value is “1” (step S741). Here, when the notification target storage number is “1”, the storage number is “1” in the winning determination result buffer 200 as a target for notifying that the variable display result may be “big hit” in the pre-reading effect. The variable display corresponding to the determination result is selected. That is, in the start winning memory display area 5H, the variable display corresponding to the leftmost display part (the variable display that was suspended first) among the display parts whose display colors are changing is selected as the notification target. Therefore, if the notification target storage number is “1”, there is no indication of variable display hold on the left display part in the start winning storage display area 5H, and the notification target is left hold (old hold). It is restricted (prohibited) to move to.

  Therefore, only when the notification target storage number is not “1” in step S741 (step S741; No), based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the tilt direction sensor unit 32, the tilt operation to the left is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a detection (step S742). At this time, if a leftward tilt operation is detected (step S742; Yse), for example, 1 is added to the leftward tilt count value that is the stored value of the leftward tilt counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. (Step S743).

  Following the process of step S743, it is determined whether or not the leftward tilt count value has reached a target change determination value determined in advance by an effect control pattern or the like (step S744). At this time, if the target change determination value has been reached (step S744; Yes), the notification target storage number buffer value is updated by 1 (step S745). As a result, the variable display corresponding to the determination result with the memory number 1 smaller in the winning determination result buffer 200 is selected as a target for notifying the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” in the pre-reading effect.

  If the leftward tilt operation is not detected in step S742 (step S742; No), or after the process of step S745 is executed, the count value is set to “0” by clearing the leftward tilt counter or the like. (Step S746).

  When it is not the tilt operation period in step S733 (step S733; No), or when the notification target storage number is “1” in step S741 (step S741; Yes), the leftward tilt count value is determined in step S744. When the target change determination value has not been reached (step S744; No), or after the processing of step S746 has been executed, it is determined whether or not it is the push / pull detection period based on settings in the effect control pattern. (Step S747 in FIG. 61). The operation explanation period, the tilt detection period, and the push-pull detection period corresponding to the pre-read effect of the pre-read effect type CS1 are the operation explanation period, the tilt detection period, and the push-pull detection corresponding to the operation effect C-1 shown in FIG. It may be set by the production control pattern so as to start and end in the same order as the period. In particular, the push-pull detection period may be started after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the tilt operation period is started.

  If it is not the push-pull detection period in step S747 (step S747; No), the stick use pre-reading effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is the push / pull detection period (step S747; Yes), whether or not an instruction operation (push / pull operation) for the trigger button 31A has been detected based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A or the like. Is determined (step S748). At this time, if there is no instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A (step S748; No), the stick use pre-reading effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when an instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A is detected (step S748; Yes), for example, a notification target storage number indicated by a notification target storage number buffer value or the like is specified (step S749). ).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S749, notification that the notification of the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” has been completed for the determination result (prefetch result) of the storage number corresponding to the specified notification target storage number. It is determined whether it has been completed (step S750). Here, the information indicating whether or not the determination result (prefetch result) of each storage number has been notified is the prefetch result notification completion provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 by the process of step S757 described later. It only has to be stored in a buffer or the like.

  When it is determined in step S750 that the prefetching result has been notified (step S750; Yes), the stick use prefetching effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pre-read result has not been notified (step S750; No), the determination result stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 is read (step S751). For example, the determination result stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 in association with the same storage number as the notification target storage number may be read. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the read determination result indicates a winning time determination (step S752). At this time, if it is not the determination per winning time (step S752; No), it is further determined whether or not the determination result indicates within the specific pattern common range (step S753).

  When the winning time determination is made at step S752 (step S752; Yes), or within the specific pattern common range at step S753 (step S753; Yes), the chance notification is made based on the setting in the effect control pattern. Production operation control for producing the production is performed (step S754). At this time, for example, a chance notification completion flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like is set to an on state (step S755). When it is not within the specific pattern common range in step S753 (step S753; No), in response to the fact that it is outside the specific pattern common range, effect operation control for executing the loss notification effect is performed (step S756).

  After performing either of the processes of steps S755 and S756, the prefetching result has been notified, for example, by storing the notification target storage number specified from the notification target storage number buffer value in the prefetching result notification completion buffer. Is stored (step S757), and the stick use pre-reading effect process is terminated. Thus, for the determination result (prefetch result) stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 in association with the same storage number as the notification target storage number, when the chance notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed. It is only necessary to memorize that the notification of the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” has been completed. The determination result (prefetch result) of the storage number held in the prefetch result notification completion buffer is prefetched in step S750 even when an instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A is detected in step S748. Since it is determined that the result has been notified, it is possible to prevent duplicate chance notification effects and loss notification effects from being performed.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of repeated pre-reading effect processing executed in step S600 of FIG. 58 in correspondence with the case where the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2 is executed. In the continuous hit pre-reading effect process shown in FIG. 62, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is an operation explanation period based on, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the pre-reading effect type CS2. Is determined (step S771). Then, when it is the operation explanation period (step S771; Yes), after the control of the effect operation serving as the operation explanation effect is performed (step S772), the repeated hit pre-read effect process is terminated.

  If it is not the operation explanation period in step S771 (step S771; No), it is determined whether or not it is the operation detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern (step S773). The operation detection period is a period for effectively detecting the player's instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B, but the player's instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A can also be detected effectively. . Therefore, the player may operate the push button 31B or the trigger button 31A.

  If it is not the operation detection period in step S773 (step S773; No), the continuous hit pre-reading effect process is terminated. Even when it is not the operation detection period, the presentation operation control other than the operation detection period may be performed based on the setting in the presentation control pattern. On the other hand, when it is the operation detection period (step S773; Yes), whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B has been detected based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the push sensor 35B or the like. Determination is made (step S774). At this time, if there is no instruction operation (push-down operation) for the push button 31B (step S774; No), an instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A is performed based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A. It is determined whether or not there is a detection (step S775). Thus, in the pre-reading effect using the push button 31B corresponding to the pre-reading effect type CS2, it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B is detected, and an instruction operation (pressing) for the push button 31B is detected. It is possible to change the effect mode (effect content) according to the operation), and also determine whether or not the instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A is detected, and the instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A It is also possible to change the production mode (production content) according to the situation.

  If there is no instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A in step S775 (step S775; No), the repeated hitting pre-reading effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B is detected in step S774 (step S774; Yes), an instruction operation (pushing operation) for the trigger button 31A is detected in step S775. In this case (step S775; Yes), for example, the operation count value which is the stored value of the operation count counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is updated so as to add 1 (step S776).

  Following the process of step S776, the notification execution determination value indicated in the notification target selection pattern is specified (step S777). At this time, it is only necessary that the production control CPU 120 can identify the notification execution determination value by referring to the notification target selection pattern selected as the usage pattern based on the notification target storage number indicated by the notification target storage number buffer value or the like. . Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the operation count value has reached the notification execution determination value (step S778). At this time, if the notification execution determination value has not been reached (step S778; No), the continuous hit pre-reading effect process is terminated.

  When the operation count value reaches the notification execution determination value in step S778 (step S778; Yes), the operation count counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S779). Further, for example, a notification target storage number indicated by a notification target storage number buffer value or the like is specified (step S780). Subsequently, the determination result of the storage number corresponding to the specified notification target storage number is read from the winning determination result buffer 200 (step S781). Then, it is determined whether or not the read determination result indicates determination per winning time (step S782). At this time, if it is not the winning time winning determination (step S782; No), it is further determined whether or not the determination result indicates within the specific pattern common range (step S783).

  When the winning time determination is made at step S782 (step S782; Yes) or within the specific pattern common range at step S783 (step S783; Yes), the chance notification is made based on the setting in the effect control pattern. Effect operation control for executing the effect is performed (step S784). At this time, for example, a chance notification completion flag provided in the production control flag setting unit 191 or the like is set to an on state (step S785). When it is not within the specific pattern common range in step S783 (step S783; No), in response to the fact that it is outside the specific pattern common range, effect operation control for executing the loss notification effect is performed (step S786).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S785 and S786, it is determined whether or not the notification target storage number specified from the notification target storage number buffer value has reached the determination result storage number maximum value (step S787). ). When the determination result storage number maximum value has been reached (step S787; Yes), the chance detection effect and the loss notification effect corresponding to all the determination results (prefetch results) have been completed, so the operation detection period is ended. From (step S788), the continuous hit pre-reading effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result storage number maximum value is not reached (step S787; No), there is a determination result (prefetch result) in which the chance notification effect or the loss notification effect is not yet executed. After updating so that the notification target storage number buffer value is incremented by 1 (step S789), the consecutive hit pre-reading effect process is terminated.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the stick push combined use pre-reading effect process executed in step S601 of FIG. 58 in correspondence with the case where the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS3 is executed. In the stick push combined use pre-reading effect process shown in FIG. 63, the effect control CPU 120 first performs the stick use pre-reading effect process similar to the case where the pre-reading effect of the pre-read effect type CS1 is executed (step S801). . Even if the same stick-use pre-reading effect process as when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 is executed, the effect in the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS3 is set by the setting in the effect control pattern. It suffices if the mode (production content) can be made different from the production mode (production content) in the prefetching production of the prefetching production type CS1.

  After the stick use pre-reading effect process is executed in step S801, it is determined whether or not it is a pressing detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern (step S802). The pressing detection period is a period during which a player's instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B is detected effectively.

  The press detection period may be started after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the push / pull detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern. FIG. 64 shows a setting example of an operation explanation period, a tilt detection period, a push / pull detection period, and further a press detection period. In the setting example shown in FIG. 64, the push-pull detection period, the push-pull detection period, and the press-down detection period are the same as the operation explanation period, the tilt detection period, and the press-down detection period corresponding to the operation effect C-2 shown in FIG. It only has to start in order. For example, the timing T3 that comes after the start timing T2 of the push / pull detection period is the start timing of the press detection period.

  The start timing T2 of the push / pull detection period and the start timing T3 of the press detection period may be set to the same timing so that the press detection period starts simultaneously with the start of the push / pull detection period. Alternatively, when there is no instruction operation (tilt operation) for the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 during the tilt detection period, or when there is no instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A during the push-pull detection period, The detection period may not be started. That is, in the press detection period, there is an instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 in the tilt detection period, or an instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A in the push-pull detection period. You may make it start on the condition of either one or both among things. Thereby, when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS3 is executed, when there is no instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30, or the instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A is performed. When there is not, it is possible to perform only the effect operation common to the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS1 without performing the effect operation peculiar to the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS3.

  After the pressing detection period is started, when an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B is detected, as shown by a broken line in FIG. Thereafter, the instruction operation by the player may be invalidated (detection prohibited).

  After effect operation control (step S754 in FIG. 61) for executing the chance notification effect is performed in the stick use pre-read effect process in step S801, control is performed so as not to be the pressing detection period, and variable display is performed. You may be made not to alert | report repeatedly that the variable display which may become a result is a big hit. When it is not the pressing detection period in step S802 (step S802; No), the stick push combined use pre-reading effect process is ended.

  When it is a pressing detection period in step S802 (step S802; Yes), effect operation control for executing a push promotion effect is performed (step S803). The push promotion effect only needs to include an effect operation that prompts the user to act on the push button 31 </ b> B in the same effect mode (effect content) as the operation promotion effect in the case of executing the “pre-operation notice”. Thereafter, based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the push sensor 35B, it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B has been detected (step S804). At this time, if there is no instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B (step S804; No), the stick push combined use pre-reading effect process is terminated.

  If an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B is detected in step S804 (step S804; Yes), all determination results stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 are read (step S805). In this embodiment, the prefetching effect of the prefetching effect type CS3 is executed only when the determination result indicating the winning time determination is stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 (FIG. 17A). reference). Accordingly, among the determination results read out in step S805, those indicating the winning time determination are included.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S805, for example, based on settings in the effect control pattern, effect operation control for executing all notification effects is performed (step S806). In the all notification effect, an effect that notifies the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” for all the variable displays that are put on hold or the variable display for which the determination result (prefetch result) has not been notified yet. Operation is performed. As an example, the chance notification effect and the loss notification effect corresponding to all the display parts whose display colors are changed in the start winning memory display area 5H may be performed collectively. And since the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS3 is executed only when the determination result indicating the winning time determination is stored, when the all-notification effect is executed or all-notification effect A chance notification effect is also executed before the is executed. Therefore, the chance notification completion flag is set to the on state (step S807). At this time, since all the determination results (prefetching results) are notified, it is not necessary to detect any further instruction operation on the stick controller 30 or the push button 31B. Therefore, after each detection period such as the tilt operation period and the push / pull detection period in the stick pre-reading effect process or the press detection period in the stick-push pre-reading effect process is ended (step S808), the stick push combined use destination The reading effect process is terminated.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end effect process executed in step S176 of FIG. In the jackpot end effect process shown in FIG. 65, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not an ending effect that is executing an ending effect corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state is being executed (step S611). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether the ending effect is being performed by determining whether the ending effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on. The ending effect flag may be set to the on state when setting for starting the ending effect is performed in the process of step S614 described later. The ending effect flag may be cleared and turned off when it is determined that the ending effect time has elapsed in the process of step S615 described later.

  If the ending effect is not being performed in step S611 (step S611; No), an ending effect determining process is executed (step S612). At this time, a predetermined time is set as the ending effect time (step S613). And after setting for starting an ending effect based on the execution result of the ending effect determination process in step S612 etc. (step S614), the big hit end effect process is complete | finished.

  When the ending effect is being performed in step S611 (step S611; Yes), it is determined whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed (step S615). At this time, if the ending effect time has not elapsed (step S615; No), effect operation control for executing the ending effect is performed (step S616), and then the big hit end effect process is ended. On the other hand, when the ending effect time has elapsed (step S615; Yes), the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S617), and then the big hit end effect process is terminated.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect determination process executed in step S612 of FIG. In the ending effect determination process shown in FIG. 66, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the pre-read effect has been executed in the big hit gaming state (step S831). For example, the effect control CPU 120 only needs to be able to determine whether or not the prefetch effect has been executed by determining whether or not the prefetch effect execution flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on. . The pre-reading effect execution flag may be set to the on state in accordance with the execution of the pre-reading effect, for example, by the process of step S718 shown in FIG. Further, the pre-reading effect execution flag may be cleared and turned off after the determination in step S831.

  If it is determined in step S831 that the pre-reading effect has been executed (step S831; Yes), it is determined whether or not the chance notification completion flag is on (step S832). At this time, if the chance notification completion flag is on (step S832; Yes), the chance notification completion flag is cleared and turned off (step S833).

  When the chance notification completion flag is OFF in step S832 (step S832; No), for example, the determination result storage number maximum value is specified by reading the determination result storage count value (step S834). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified determination result storage number maximum value is greater than or equal to a predetermined redetermination executable value (eg, “1”) (step S835).

  When it is not less than the re-determination executable value in step S835 (step S835; Yes), the stored content of the winning determination result buffer 200 is checked (step S836). For example, in the process of step S836, the determination result stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 from the storage number “1” to the maximum determination result storage number is sequentially read, and the determination indicating “winning time determination” is performed. What is necessary is just to determine whether the determination result which shows a result and "within a specific pattern common range" is memorize | stored.

  Following the processing of step S836, the ending prefetch effect determination table 143 is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not to execute the ending prefetch effect (step S837). Further, numerical data indicating the random number SR4 for determining the pre-reading effect during ending is extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S838). Then, based on the random value SR4 extracted in step S838, by referring to the ending prefetch effect determination table 143 selected as the use table, it is determined whether or not to execute the ending prefetch effect (step). S839). At this time, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S839 is an effect of executing the ending prefetch effect (step S840).

  When it is determined in step S831 that the pre-reading effect is not executed (step S831; No), or when the determination result storage number maximum value is less than the re-determination executable value in step S835 (step S835; No) ), Or when it is determined in step S840 that there is no effect (step S840; No), an effect control pattern prepared in advance for executing the normal effect during ending is selected (step S844), and then the ending effect The decision process is terminated.

  After performing the process of step S833 based on the determination that the chance notification completion flag is on in step S832, or when it is determined in step S840 that there is an effect (step S840; Yes), the pre-reading effect at the ending time After selecting an effect control pattern prepared in advance for executing (step S842), the ending effect determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 67 shows an example of an effect display in the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS1 or the prefetch effect type CS3. In this effect display example, first, for example, a definite decorative symbol of a jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 67A is completely stopped and displayed as a final stop symbol (step S573 in FIG. 56). Thereafter, when the pre-reading effect type CS1 or the pre-reading effect type CS3 is determined in step S706 shown in FIG. 59, a variable display storage number serving as the initial position of the notification target is set by the processing of steps S709 to S712. The As illustrated in FIG. 18, the notification target initial position determination table 141 stores each of the storage numbers so that the notification target initial storage number is determined at a predetermined ratio from the storage numbers equal to or smaller than the determination result storage number maximum value. A decision value is assigned to the number. Thereby, whenever the prefetch effect of prefetch effect type CS1 or prefetch effect type CS3 is started, the variable display used as the initial position of information object is chosen at random.

  When the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 or the pre-reading effect type CS3 is started in this way, the operation explanation period starts (step S731 in FIG. 60; Yes). The effect image that prompts the player to perform an instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and an instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A as shown in FIG. Thereafter, when the operation explanation period ends (step S731; No), the tilt detection period starts (step S733; Yes), and the instruction operation (tilt operation) for the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is validated.

  In the tilt detection period, it is determined whether or not there has been a rightward tilt operation on the operation rod 30A by the process of step S736 shown in FIG. 60, and whether or not there has been a leftward tilt operation on the operation rod 30A by the process of step S742. The determination is performed, and the display parts indicated by the hand effect image as shown in FIG. 67C are sequentially updated according to the detection result of the tilting operation (steps S737 to S740, S743 to S746). After the tilt detection period is started, a push-pull detection period is reached after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed (step S747 in FIG. 61; Yes), and an instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 is entered. ) Is activated.

  In the push-pull detection period, it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (push-pull operation) has been performed on the trigger button 31A by the process of step S748. If there is an operation (step S748; Yes), a winning determination result buffer In 200, the determination result (prefetching result) stored in association with the storage number serving as the notification target storage number is read (step S751). If the determination result indicates “winning time determination” (step S752; Yes) or “specific pattern common range” (step S753; Yes), a chance notification corresponding to the notification target storage number is made. By performing the effect operation control for executing the effect (step S754), as shown in FIG. 67 (E), after the effect image in which one of the display parts is divided with the hammer is displayed, the character image shown in FIG. As shown in (F), an effect image or the like indicating a message such as “You did it!” Is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the determination result (prefetching result) corresponding to the notification target storage number indicates “outside the specific pattern common range” (step S753; No), the loss notification effect according to the notification target storage number is performed. By performing the effect operation control for execution (step S756), the effect image in which any one display part is divided with a hammer is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. In contrast, it is only necessary to display an effect image showing a message such as “sorry losing ...”.

  In the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1, for example, it is possible to repeatedly execute the effect operation of updating the notification target and dividing the display part until the tilt detection period or the press detection period set by the effect control pattern or the like ends. What is necessary is just to enable it to divide the display part of the start winning memory | storage display area 5H sequentially.

  In the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS3, for example, after a push-pull detection period is started, a predetermined period elapses and a press-down detection period is set (step S802 in FIG. 63; Yes), and an instruction operation on the push button 31B ( Press operation) is activated. At this time, the player may be prompted to perform an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B, for example, by displaying a predetermined effect image in the display area of the image display device 5.

  In the pressing detection period, it is determined whether or not there has been an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B by the process of step S804. If there is an operation (step S804; Yes), the winning determination result buffer 200 is determined. All the determination results (prefetch results) stored are read (step S805). Then, by performing the effect operation control for executing the all notification effect (step S806), as shown in FIG. 67 (G), an effect image in which the character divides all display parts with a hammer is displayed. do it.

  In the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS3, when the instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B is detected, the variable display result is “big hit” for all variable displays that are held and all notification effects are executed. ”Is notified. After such all notification effects are executed, the detection periods such as the tilt detection period, the push / pull detection period, and the press detection period may be ended regardless of the setting based on the effect control pattern (step S808).

  In the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS3, based on the setting in the effect control pattern or the like, the effect operation becomes an effect mode (effect content) similar to the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 until the press detection period. May be performed. As a result, the player determines which of the pre-reading effects of the pre-reading effect type CS1 and the pre-reading effects of the pre-reading effect type CS3 is being executed in the period until the timing when the pressing detection period starts. It becomes difficult to do. Then, when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS3 is executed, it is determined that the “big hit” is made by the variable display being held. Thereby, even when the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS1 is executed, the expectation that the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS3 is executed is maintained, and the player's operation on the stick controller 30 is promoted. , Can improve the game entertainment.

  FIG. 68 shows an effect display example in the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS2. In this effect display example, first, for example, a definite decorative symbol of a jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 68 (A) is displayed as a final stop symbol and is displayed in a completely stopped manner (step S573 in FIG. 56). Thereafter, when the pre-reading effect type CS2 is determined in step S706 shown in FIG. 59, a notification target selection pattern is determined by the processing in steps S713 to S715. In this embodiment, three types of notification target selection patterns HSP1 to HSP3 as shown in FIG. 19 (B) are prepared in advance, and the notification execution determination value corresponding to the notification target storage number is set. Are different from each other. As shown in FIG. 19A, the notification target selection pattern determination table 142 determines the determination ratio of the notification target selection pattern HSP1 to the notification target selection pattern HSP3 according to the result of checking the stored contents of the winning determination result buffer 200. Are determined for each notification target selection pattern. Thereby, the chance notification effect and the loss notification effect in the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2 are executed according to the presence / absence of the determination result indicating “winning time determination” and the determination result indicating “within a specific pattern common range”. The ease (the number of required operations until the notification effect execution) can be varied. In this effect display example, the notification target selection pattern HSP3 is determined as the usage pattern by the process of step S715.

  When the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2 is started in this way, the operation explanation period starts (step S771 in FIG. 62; Yes), and the push as shown in FIG. An effect image that prompts the player to perform an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the button 31B is displayed. Thereafter, when the operation explanation period ends (step S771; No), an operation detection period starts (step S773; Yes), and the instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B is validated. At this time, not only the instruction operation (push-down operation) for the push button 31B but also the instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A is validated. Therefore, the player can also perform an operation required for the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS2 by an instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30.

  In the operation detection period, it is determined whether or not there has been an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B in the process of step S774 shown in FIG. 62, and whether or not there has been an instruction operation (push / pull operation) on the trigger button 31A in the process of step S775. If it is determined that there is an operation (step S774; Yes or step S775; Yes), the operation count value is incremented by 1 in step S776. Thus, when the player performs an instruction operation (push-down operation) on the push button 31B and an instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A three times, the operation count value is “3”. Here, when the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS2 is started, the notification target storage number buffer value is set to “1” in step S716 shown in FIG. In the process of step S777 shown in FIG. 62, “3” is specified as the notification execution determination value from the notification target selection pattern HSP3 based on the notification target storage number buffer value being “1”.

  When the operation count value thus reaches the notification execution determination value (step S778; Yes), it is stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 in association with the storage number “1” that is the notification target storage number in the process of step S781. The determined determination result (prefetch result) is read out. If the determination result read at this time indicates “outside the specific pattern common range” (step S783; No), the effect operation control for executing the loss notification effect corresponding to the notification target storage number “1” is performed. By performing (step S786), as shown in FIG. 68 (C), an effect image for notifying that the special figure display result based on the hold data corresponding to the hold number “1” is “lost” is displayed. . At this time, the notification target storage number buffer value is incremented by 1 and updated to “2” by the process of step S789.

  Thereafter, the player performs an instruction operation (push-down operation) on the push button 31B and an instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A three more times, and the total number of operations since the pre-reading effect is started is six times. When it reaches, since the notification execution determination value when the notification target storage number is “2” in the notification target selection pattern HSP3 is also “3”, it corresponds to the notification target storage number “2” in the process of step S781. In addition, the determination result (prefetch result) stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 is read. If the determination result read at this time also indicates “outside the specific pattern common range”, by performing effect operation control for executing the loss notification effect corresponding to the notification target storage number “2”, FIG. As shown to (D), the effect image which alert | reports that the special figure display result based on the hold data corresponding to hold number "2" becomes "lose" is displayed.

  Further, the player performs the instruction operation (push-down operation) on the push button 31B and the instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A 12 times, and the total number of operations since the pre-reading effect has started reaches 18 times. Then, since the notification execution determination value when the notification target storage number is “3” to “6” in the notification target selection pattern HSP3 is also “3”, the notification target storage number “6” is obtained in the process of step S781. The determination result (pre-read result) stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 in association with “” is read. When the determination result read at this time indicates “winning time determination” (step S782 in FIG. 62; Yes), or “in the specific pattern common range” (step S783; Yes) ) Based on the hold data corresponding to the hold number “6” as shown in FIG. 68 (E) by performing the effect operation control for executing the chance notification effect corresponding to the notification target storage number “6”. An effect image such as “chance” or “Yatta! When the chance notification effect is executed, the chance notification completion flag is set to the on state by the process of step S785 shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, when the big hit gaming state ends, the chance notification completion flag is on (step S832; Yes in FIG. 66), and therefore an effect control pattern for the pre-reading effect at the ending is selected in step S842. As a result, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), an effect image such as “You did it!” Is displayed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the operation rod 30A that can be instructed in multiple directions (tilting operation), and the player is provided with a predetermined instruction provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod 30A. An operation effect B or operation effect C-1 using a stick controller 30 including an operation (push-pull operation) 31A capable of operation (push-pull operation) is provided at a predetermined position separate from the operation rod 30A, and a player gives a predetermined instruction. Of the operation effects A-1 and operation effects A-2 using the push button 31B capable of operation (pressing operation), any of the effect control CPU 120 that selectively performs the process of step SA06 shown in FIG. The operation effect is produced by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the push button use reach effect process shown in FIG. Alternatively, in step S560 of FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the continuous hit reach effect process shown in FIG. 46, or the like, or in the effect control CPU 120 that executes the tilt reach effect process shown in step S562 of FIG. Or by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the stick use reach effect process shown in FIG. Thereby, various effects using the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B including the operation rod 30A and the trigger button 31A can be executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  The process in step SA06 shown in FIG. 40 is executed based on the fact that it is determined in step SA02 that the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by super reach. Therefore, even when the same fluctuation pattern is determined, a plurality of types are used. It is possible to selectively determine which operation effect is to be executed among the operation effects. Thereby, while preventing the burden of game control from increasing, various effects using the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B including the operation rod 30A and the trigger button 31A are executed, thereby improving the game entertainment. Can do.

  When determining the operation effect in the process of step SA06, an operation effect determination table 144 as shown in FIG. 21A is referred to, and different operation effects can be determined according to the operation item buffer value. The operation item buffer value is set to a different value according to an instruction operation by the player, for example, by executing the processing of steps S454 to S458 shown in FIG. Thereby, according to a player's preference, the operation effect using an appropriate operation means can be performed. Further, the operation item buffer value is set to be updatable based on the operation history by the player by executing the operation item change setting process shown in, for example, step S578 of FIG. 56 or FIG. This also makes it possible to execute an operation effect using an appropriate operation means in accordance with the player's preference.

  When an operation effect that uses at least the operation rod 30A included in the stick controller 30 is executed, such as the operation effect B, the operation effect C-1, and the operation effect C-2, effects by the processes of steps SC33 and SC35 shown in FIG. In the operation control and the rendering operation control by the processing of steps SC57, SC59, and SC61 shown in FIG. 50, for example, the blower fan 33 is driven to blow air toward the stick controller 30, or the vibration motor 34 is driven to stick. In order to execute a blowing vibration effect as a predetermined effect operation that can be recognized by the player only when an instruction operation is performed on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 or the trigger button 31A by vibrating the operation rod 30A of the controller 30. Is controlled. On the other hand, when an operation effect that does not use the stick controller 30 using only the push button 31B, such as the operation effect A-1 or the operation effect A-2, is executed, the effect operation control by the process of step SC06 shown in FIG. In the effect operation control by the process of step SD20 shown in FIG. 46, the air blow vibration control is limited (prohibited) so as not to be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a predetermined performance operation that can be recognized by the player only when performing an instruction operation with respect to a predetermined operation means, such as the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30, for example, and to reduce the burden of the performance control. Can be reduced.

  In the setting example of the operation effect determination table 144 shown in FIG. 21A, when the variable display mode is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, that is, the variable display result is “big hit”. Only in this case, a determined value is assigned so that the operation effect C-2 can be determined. When the operation effect C-2 is determined by the process of step SA06 shown in FIG. 40, the stick controller is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the stick push combined reach effect process shown in FIG. Operation effect C-2 using both 30 and the push button 31B is executed as a composite operation effect. As described above, when the operation effect C-2 is executed, it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, so that the player can increase the expectation that the operation effect C-2 will be executed and increase the player's stick controller 30. By promoting such operations, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  In the process of step SA16 shown in FIG. 40, when the big hit finalizing effect SP3 is determined with reference to the big hit finalizing effect determination table 146 as shown in FIG. 22A, steps SB25 and SB26 shown in FIG. The big hit finalizing effect is executed at the first operation when the operation rod 30A, the trigger button 31A, or the push button 31B of the stick controller 30 is first operated during the execution of the operation effect by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of SB29. Is done. When the jackpot finalizing effect SP4 is determined in the process of step SA16 shown in FIG. 40, the stick controller 30 in the operation effect is provided by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps SB27 to SB29 shown in FIG. The jackpot finalizing effect is executed when the achievement effect is executed in response to the instruction operation on the operation button 30A, the trigger button 31A or the push button 31B. Thus, by executing the jackpot finalizing effect at the timing related to the instruction operation in the operation performance, it is possible to enhance the unexpectedness of the jackpot finalizing effect and improve the game entertainment. In addition, when the player performs an instruction operation in the operation effect, the jackpot finalizing effect is executed. On the other hand, when the player does not perform the instruction operation, the jackpot finalizing effect is not executed. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the instruction operation.

  When the operation effect A-1 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there has been an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B in the process of step SC04 shown in FIG. 44, and the process of step SC05 is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (push / pull operation) has been performed on the trigger button 31A. If any of the determinations indicates that there is an operation, the processing in steps SC09 to SC13 can be executed. Therefore, in accordance with the instruction operation (push / pull operation) for the trigger button 31A, the operation effect A-1 is executed in the same effect mode (effect contents) as the instruction operation (push operation) for the push button 31B. When the operation effect A-2 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an instruction operation (pressing operation) to the push button 31B in the process of step SD04 shown in FIG. 46, and in step SD05. It is determined whether or not an instruction operation (push-pull operation) has been performed on the trigger button 31A in the process, and if any operation is determined by any determination, processes such as steps SD08 to SD10 can be executed. Therefore, in accordance with the instruction operation (push / pull operation) for the trigger button 31A, the operation effect A-2 is executed in the same effect mode (effect contents) as the instruction operation (push operation) for the push button 31B. Thereby, in the operation effect A-1 and the operation effect A-2, the player performs the instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A instead of the instruction operation (push-down operation) on the push button 31B. Since it becomes a production mode (production content), the player's interest can be concentrated on the operation of the stick controller 30, and the player's operation can be promoted to improve the game entertainment.

  When the operation effect A-2 is executed, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps SD08 and SD09 shown in FIG. 46, the number of times that the operation is determined in the processing of step SD04 and step SD05 is predetermined. The determination result of whether or not there is a hit may be made different depending on whether or not the number of dolphins is reached. Since the push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position different from the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30, the player can easily perform a continuous instruction operation (continuous hitting operation) than the trigger button 31A. Therefore, the effect mode (effect content) in the operation effect A-2 using the push button 31B is appropriately changed according to the instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game. Can be improved.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, an operation rod 30A capable of performing an instruction operation (tilting operation) in multiple directions, and a player performs a predetermined instruction operation (push-pull operation) provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod 30A. A pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type SC1 using the stick controller 30 including the possible trigger button 31A and a predetermined instruction operation (pressing operation) that is provided at a predetermined position separate from the operation rod 30A. Among the prefetch effects of the prefetch effect type SC2 using the push button 31B, any one of the prefetch effects determined by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S706 shown in FIG. 59 is shown in step S598 of FIG. 60 or 61 for performing the stick use pre-reading effect process shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, or in step S600 of FIG. 58 or FIG. Due presentation control CPU120 for executing a barrage destination 読演 out process shown in and executed. Thereby, various effects using the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B including the operation rod 30A and the trigger button 31A can be executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  When the prefetch effect type is determined in the process of step S706 shown in FIG. 59, the result of checking the stored contents of the winning determination result buffer 200 in step S703, or for the prefetch effect type determination extracted in step S705. Whether the winning determination result buffer storage content check result is “There is determination per winning time” by referring to the pre-reading effect type determination table 140 selected in step S704 based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR1 of Depending on whether or not, ie, whether or not the variable display whose variable display result is “big hit” is determined to be held, either the pre-reading effect type CS1 or the pre-reading effect type CS2 is different at a different rate. It is decided. Accordingly, the “big hit” is indicated by the variable display that is put on hold depending on which of the prefetch effects of the prefetch effect type CS1 and the prefetch effects of the prefetch effect type CS2 is executed. The expectation that the game value is given by being controlled to the big hit game state is made different, the operation of the stick controller 30 and the like by the player is promoted, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the setting example of the prefetch effect type determination table 140 shown in FIG. 17A, when the winning determination result buffer storage content check result is “There is determination per winning time”, more determination values are obtained than in other cases. It is assigned to the prefetch effect type CS1. Therefore, when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 using the stick controller 30 is executed, the “big hit” is displayed with the variable display being held, rather than when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2 is executed. Thus, the expectation that the game value is given by being controlled to the big hit game state is enhanced. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 is enhanced, the player's operation on the stick controller 30 including the operation rod 30A and the trigger button 31A is promoted, and the gaming interest is improved. Can do.

  In the winning determination result buffer 200, “within a specific pattern common range” or “outside a specific pattern common range” depending on whether or not the random value SR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of the specific pattern common range. The determination result shown can be stored. For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the specific pattern common range is set in advance as a common numerical value range that is determined as a variation pattern with super reach regardless of the number of special figure reservations. That is, in the setting examples of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B shown in FIG. 11B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time medium) 132C shown in FIG. 11C, the fluctuation pattern with super reach. At least a part of the determined values corresponding to the variation pattern types CA2-3 to be classified is the same determined value (for example, “230” to “251”) regardless of the number of special figure hold memories when the variable display is started. Is set. On the other hand, the decision values corresponding to the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 for which the non-reach variation patterns are classified, the variation pattern types CA2-1 to which the variation patterns with normal reach are classified, and the variation patterns As the determined value corresponding to the type CA2-2, a different determined value is set according to the number of special figure hold memories when variable display is started. The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the process of step S406 shown in FIG. 28 when the game ball passes the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the random value MR3 is the same determined value. By determining whether or not any of “230” to “251” is matched, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern with super reach is determined. When the effect control CPU 120 determines the prefetch effect type in the process of step S706 shown in FIG. 59, the winning determination result is obtained by referring to the prefetch effect type determination table 140 as shown in FIG. Depending on whether or not the buffer storage content check result is “within a specific pattern common range”, that is, depending on whether or not it is determined to be a variation pattern with super reach, the pre-reading effect is different. It is determined as either type CS1 or pre-reading effect type CS2. Therefore, depending on which of the pre-reading effects of the pre-reading effect type CS1 and the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2 is executed, the super-reach is displayed with the variable display being held. The expectation that the reach effect is executed can be made different to promote the player's operation of the stick controller 30 and the like, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the setting example of the prefetch effect type determination table 140 shown in FIG. 17A, when the winning determination result buffer storage content check result is “within a specific pattern common range”, when it is “other than the above” (specific pattern common). More determined values are assigned to the prefetch effect type CS1 than in the case of out of range. Therefore, when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 using the stick controller 30 is executed, the super-reach is displayed with the variable display being held more than when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2 is executed. The expectation that the reach production is executed is enhanced. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 is increased, and the player's operation with respect to the stick controller 30 including the operation rod 30A and the trigger button 31A is promoted, thereby improving the gaming interest. be able to.

  Further, the CPU 103 determines that the same determined value “230” corresponding to the variation pattern type CA2-3 is set in the processing of step S406 shown in FIG. ”To“ 251 ”and whether or not the random value SR3 matches, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern with super reach is determined. Therefore, even before the variable display is started, it can be reliably determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined.

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines the prefetch effect type in the process of step S706 shown in FIG. 59, the winning determination result is obtained by referring to the prefetch effect type determination table 140 as shown in FIG. The pre-reading effect type CS3 may be determined only when the buffer storage content check result is “There is a determination per winning time”. At this time, the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS3 using both the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B is performed by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the stick push combined use prefetch effect process shown in step S601 of FIG. 58 and FIG. 63. This is executed as a composite operation effect. Thus, when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS3 is executed, it is determined that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state with “big hit” in the variable display that is put on hold. The game interest can be improved by enhancing the sense of expectation that the pre-reading effect of CS3 is executed and promoting the operation of the stick controller 30 and the like by the player.

  In the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1, the operation control CPU 120 operates the stick controller 30 by executing the processes of steps S733 to S757 in the stick use pre-reading effect process shown in FIGS. The notification target storage number can be updated according to the instruction operation (tilting operation) for 30A, and the chance notification effect or the loss notification effect according to the notification target storage number when there is an instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A. Is executed. In this case, the notification target initial storage number indicating the initial position of the notification target is selected in step S709 based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR2 for determining the notification target initial position extracted in step S710 shown in FIG. With reference to the notification target initial position determination table 141, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S711 determines the storage number that is equal to or less than the maximum notification result storage number at a predetermined ratio. Thereby, every time the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS1 is executed, the initial position of the notification target is changed, and the content of the instruction operation (tilting operation) for the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 requested by the player. It is possible to improve the game interest by promoting the player's operation by making the difference.

  When the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 is executed, the instruction operation (tilting operation) for the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is activated first by the setting in the effect control pattern or the like during the tilt detection period. After that, after a predetermined period elapses, it becomes a push / pull detection period, and the instruction operation (push / pull operation) for the trigger button 31A is validated. Accordingly, the trigger button 31A is erroneously instructed and operated before the operating rod 30A is instructed to operate to update the notification target storage number corresponding to the variable display to be notified, and the player It is possible to prevent an unintended chance notification effect or a loss notification effect from being executed.

  When the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS2 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there has been an instruction operation (pressing operation) for the push button 31B in the process of step S774 shown in FIG. In step S775, it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (push-pull operation) has been performed on the trigger button 31A. If any of the determinations indicates that there is an operation, the processing from step S776 can be executed. Therefore, in accordance with the instruction operation (push / pull operation) on the trigger button 31A, the prefetch effect of the prefetch effect type CS2 is executed in the same effect mode (effect contents) as the instruction operation (push operation) on the push button 31B. . Thereby, in the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2, even if the player performs an instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A instead of an instruction operation (push-down operation) on the push button 31B, the same effect mode Therefore, the player's interest can be concentrated on the operation of the stick controller 30 and the player's operation can be promoted to improve the game interest.

  In the prefetching effect of the prefetching effect type CS2, every time it is determined that there is an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B in the process of step S774 shown in FIG. 62, the operation count value is calculated by the process of step S776. When the operation count value reaches the notification execution determination value in the process of step S778, a chance notification effect or a loss notification effect based on the determination result (prefetch result) corresponding to the notification target storage number is executed. The Since the push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position different from the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30, the player can easily perform a continuous instruction operation (continuous hitting operation) than the trigger button 31A. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate is increased by appropriately changing the effect mode (effect content) in the pre-read effect of the pre-read effect type CS2 using the push button 31B according to the instruction operation (pressing operation) to the push button 31B. This can improve the game entertainment.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, in the above embodiment, by performing the processing of steps S454 to S458 shown in FIG. 37, it becomes possible to determine different operation effects based on the player's settings, and in step S578 of FIG. As described above, the operation item change setting process shown in 57 is executed, so that different operation effects can be determined based on the operation history by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different operation effect may be determined based on one of the player setting and the player operation history.

  In the above-described embodiment, the instruction operation by the player at the notice effect is also captured in the operation history by the processing of steps SB04, SB05, SB07, and SB08 shown in FIG. On the other hand, only the instruction operation by the player at the operation effect may be taken into the operation history to determine the operation effect. Alternatively, in the case where the production mode (production content) is changed in response to an instruction operation on the stick controller 30 or the push button 31B in any production operation including not only the notice production but also the re-lottery production and the probable promotion effect. The instruction operation by the user may be taken into the operation history, and the operation effect may be determined based on the operation history.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game effect is being executed in the operation effect based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game and the game value is given by being controlled to the jackpot game state. Achievement effect or non-delivery effect that notifies the possibility of “big hit” with variable display is executed, chance notification effect or loss notification that notifies the possibility of “big hit” with variable display held in pre-reading effect It demonstrated as what a production is performed. On the other hand, the gaming value given by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is such that, for example, the probability that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a big hit symbol is improved after the big hit gaming state is finished. There may be. In this case, in the operation effect, an achievement effect or a non-delivery effect that notifies the possibility of “15R probability variation big hit” or “16R probability variation big hit” in the variable display being executed is executed, and variable display that is suspended in the pre-reading effect. The chance notification effect and the loss notification effect for notifying the possibility of becoming “15R probability variation big hit” or “16R probability variation big hit” may be executed.

  As an example, when the variable display mode is “probable change (big hit)” in the operation effect determination table 144, the operation effect A-1 and the operation effect B are not determined as the operation effect A-1 and the operation effect B. It is only necessary that the determination value is assigned so that the determination ratio of C-1 is higher than in other cases. In such a setting, when the operation effect A-2 or the operation effect C-1 is executed, the variable display during execution becomes “big hit”, and the big hit type becomes “15R probability change” or “16R probability change”. Therefore, the expectation of becoming a probable change state after the end of the big hit gaming state is enhanced. In this case, the player's willingness to participate in the operation effects A-2 and C-1 can be enhanced, the player's operation with respect to the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B, etc. can be promoted, and the game entertainment can be improved. .

  As another example, when it is determined in step S402 in FIG. 28 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type extracted in step S218 in FIG. Based on the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10 or the like, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is determined as “15R probability change” or “16R probability change”. Depending on the determination result at this time, the setting of the EXT data in the first start opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command is varied. Thereby, when the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening and the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, it is determined whether or not the variable display result becomes “big hit”. At the same time, in the case of “big hit”, it is determined whether or not the promiscuous state is entered after the end of the big hit gaming state, and an effect control command capable of specifying these determination results is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. To be able to transmit. On the side of the effect control board 12, for example, in the pre-read effect type determination table 140, when the winning determination result buffer check result is “15R probability variation” or “16R probability variation” of “there is a winning time determination”, It is only necessary that the determined value is assigned so that it is determined as any one of the pre-reading effect type CS1 to the pre-reading effect type CS3 at a determination ratio different from the other cases. As an example, in the case of “15R probability variation” or “16R probability variation”, the pre-reading effect type CS1 and the pre-reading effect type CS3 are determined in other cases without being determined as the pre-reading effect type CS2. It suffices if a determined value is assigned so as to be higher than In such a setting, when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 or the pre-reading effect type CS3 is executed, the variable display is set to “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability change” or “ 16R probability change ”, and the expectation that the probability change state is reached after the big hit gaming state ends is enhanced. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the pre-reading effects of the pre-reading effect type CS1 and the pre-reading effect type CS3 can be increased, the player's operation on the stick controller 30 and the like can be promoted, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  As another example of the game value given by the pachinko gaming machine 1, the upper limit number of special-purpose games in which time reduction control (time reduction control) or high release control is performed when the time reduction state is reached after the end of the big hit gaming state (Time reduction number) may be made different according to the determination result of the big hit type, and may be determined by determining the big hit type with a relatively large number of time reductions. In this case, in the operation effect, an achievement effect or a non-delivery effect that notifies the possibility of a relatively large number of time reductions in the case of “big hit” in the variable display being executed may be executed. In the reading effect, a chance notification effect or a loss notification effect may be executed to notify the possibility of a relatively large number of time reductions in the case of a “big hit” in the variable display held on hold.

  As another example of the gaming value given by the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, when it is determined as the big hit type of “16R probability variation”, it is compared with the big hit type of “15R uncertain variation” or “15R probability variation” Then, it may be due to the fact that the number of round executions (number of rounds) in the big hit gaming state is determined to be a big hit type. In this case, in the operation effect, an achievement effect or a non-delivery effect that informs the possibility that the jackpot type will be “16R probability change” in the case of “big hit” in the variable display being executed may be executed. In the pre-reading effect, a chance notification effect or a loss notification effect may be executed to notify the possibility that the jackpot type will be “16R probability change” in the case of “big hit” in the variable display that is put on hold.

  Also in the jackpot finalizing effect, it may be notified that any one of the above game values is given. That is, the big hit finalizing effect is, for example, the fact that it is decided that the probable change state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, or the upper limit of the special game where the time reduction control (short time control) or the high opening control is performed after the big hit gaming state is finished. The fact that it has been determined that the number of times (number of time reductions) is a relatively large jackpot type, the fact that it has been determined that the number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state (number of rounds) is a relatively large number of jackpot types, or these What is necessary is just to alert | report that the provision of arbitrary game values, such as a part or all, was decided.

  In addition, depending on the game state when the operation effect is executed and the game state before the jackpot game state where the prefetch effect is executed, a determination ratio of whether to execute the operation effect or the prefetch effect, You may make it vary the production | generation aspect (production content) etc. in an operation production or a prefetching production. For example, when the game state when the operation effect is executed or the game state before the big hit game state where the pre-reading effect is executed is a highly accurate low base state, a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode By executing the operation effect and the pre-reading effect, the rarity of the effect may be enhanced. Depending on the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, the ratio of determining whether to perform the operation effect or the pre-reading effect, the effect mode (effect contents) in the operation effect or the pre-reading effect, etc. Also good. For example, based on the fact that the jackpot type is determined to be “15R uncertain change”, the operation effect or the pre-reading effect may not be executed in a case where a short time state is reached after the jackpot game state ends.

  The operation effect may be performed within a period from when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started until the finalized decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is derived and displayed, for example, as in the case of the reach effect. As a kind of certain change promotion effect, it may be performed within a period from when a predetermined decorative symbol is derived and displayed until the display of the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is completed.

  In the above embodiment, an operation effect for notifying the possibility of becoming a “big hit” in the variable display being executed can be executed, and the possibility of becoming a “big hit” in the variable display being held is notified. For this reason, it has been described that prefetching effects can be executed. In contrast, only one of the operation effect and the prefetch effect may be configured to be executable. In addition, as a predetermined effect executed during variable display, such as a reach effect or a notice effect, for example, any one of the prefetch effect types CS1 to CS3 can be selected and executed. Good. In this case, for example, when the operation effect is determined in the process of step SA06 shown in FIG. 40, the same process as the prefetch effect determination process shown in step S596 of FIG. It is sufficient to determine whether or not to execute or to determine the type of pre-reading effect in the case of execution. If it is determined in step S555 shown in FIG. 41 that super reach is reached, step S598 in FIG. 58 or stick use pre-reading effect processing shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is performed according to the determined prefetch effect type. 58, the same processing as step S600 of FIG. 58 and the pre-reading effect processing shown in FIG. 62, or the same processing as the stick push combined use pre-reading effect processing shown in step S601 of FIG. 58 and FIG. By doing so, it is only necessary to perform presentation operation control for executing the pre-reading presentation.

  When the operation effect C-1 or the operation effect C-2 is executed, it is determined in step SC60 in FIG. 50 that there is a single shot operation that is one instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A. In the above description, the achievement effect and the non-delivery effect are executed by the processes of steps SC62 to SC65. On the other hand, the achievement effect or the non-delivery effect may not be executed until it is determined that there is a continuous shooting operation that is a plurality of instruction operations (push-pull operations) on the trigger button 31A. That is, the possibility of a “hit” in the variable display during execution may be notified by a continuous instruction operation (continuous fire operation) on the trigger button 31A.

  In this case, for example, by setting the determined value in the operation effect determination table 144 or the like, the ratio determined as the operation effect that is notified of the possibility of “big hit” based on the continuous operation on the trigger button 31A is, for example, the operation effect A The ratio may be lower than the ratio determined as the operation effect that is notified of the possibility of “big hit” based on the continuous shooting operation on the push button 31 </ b> B as shown in −2. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate by reducing the frequency of execution of the operation effect that requires the continuous shooting operation on the trigger button 31A, which is difficult to perform the continuous shooting operation, and to improve the gaming interest.

  When the prefetching effect of the prefetching effect type CS1 or the prefetching effect type CS3 is executed, every time it is determined in step S748 of FIG. 61 that there is an instruction operation (push-pull operation) on the trigger button 31A, step S749 is performed. Description has been made assuming that the chance notification effect and the loss notification effect are executed by the process of ~ S757. On the other hand, the chance notification effect or the loss notification effect may not be executed until it is determined that there is a continuous shooting operation that is a plurality of instruction operations (push-pull operations) on the trigger button 31A. That is, the possibility of a “hit” on the variable display that is put on hold may be notified by a continuous instruction operation (continuous fire operation) on the trigger button 31A.

  When the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2 is executed, depending on the number of instruction operations (pressing operations) on the push button 31B, the possibility of becoming a “hit” in the variable display that is put on hold is determined. In the above description, it is assumed that the determination results stored in the determination result buffer 200 are notified in order of the storage numbers. On the other hand, the determination result (prefetching result) to be notified in response to a single instruction operation in which the player performs an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B for a predetermined period or longer. It may be determined. Further, the number of determination results (prefetch results) that are notified every time the number of instruction operations (pressing operations) on the push button 31B reaches the notification execution determination value is arbitrary, and is stored in the winning determination result buffer 200. Notification may be sequentially performed for a plurality (for example, two) of determination results. Furthermore, the order of notification is also arbitrary, and notification may be performed first on the determination result (prefetch result) associated with the storage number “2”, or the determination result (prefetch result) on which notification is performed. May be selected at random.

  In the pre-reading effects of the pre-reading effect type CS1 to the pre-reading effect type CS3, it has been described that a chance notification effect or a loss notification effect according to the notification target storage number is executed. On the other hand, for example, when the determination result indicating “determination per winning time” is stored in the winning determination result buffer 200, the determination result before (for example, two before) the determination result is notified. When it is performed, an effect image such as “Two pieces ahead” is displayed, so that the possibility of a “hit” on the variable display that is put on hold may be announced. When a plurality of determination results indicating “winning time determination” are stored in the winning determination result buffer 200, a chance notification effect is executed for any one of the determination results, while other determination results are obtained. By executing the loss notification effect instead of the chance notification effect, it may not be notified that the “big hit” is made in a plurality of variable displays that are put on hold.

  In the above embodiment, the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A according to the winning order of each game ball, regardless of whether the game ball has passed through the first start prize port or the second start prize port. It was described that a special figure game using the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is used as a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. The game may be executed with priority over the figure game.

  In this case, the special figure display result in the special figure game using the first special figure is “big hit” when the game is controlled to the big hit game state or when the high opening control is performed in the short-time state or the certainty change state. Even if the determination result of “determination per winning time” indicating that the pre-order is stored is stored, the pre-reading effect may not be executed. Thus, when the game ball easily passes through the second start winning opening, the special figure storage unit 151A stores the numerical data indicating each random number extracted based on the passage as the reserved data. It is possible to prevent stocking of the determination result (prefetch result) in which the display result is “big hit”.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B has been described. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with one special symbol display device is also described. The invention can be applied.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 performs the processing in steps S521 to S526 shown in FIG. 39, the variable display effect setting shown in step S527 and FIG. 40, and step S553 shown in FIG. Subsequent processing, in particular, the notice effect control process shown in step S553 and FIG. 42, the jackpot confirmation effect control process shown in step S554 and FIG. 43, the push button use reach effect process shown in step S558 and FIG. 44, step S560 and FIG. , Repeated reach reach processing shown in step S562 and FIG. 48, tilt reach reach processing shown in FIG. 48, stick use reach effect processing shown in step S564 and FIG. 50, step S56 and stick push combined reach effect processing shown in FIG. 53, and FIG. Step S596 and the pre-reading effect determination shown in FIG. By executing the stick use pre-reading effect process shown in step S598, FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, the step hit pre-reading effect process shown in step S600 and FIG. 62, the step S601 and the stick push combined use pre-reading effect process shown in FIG. In the above description, it is assumed that various rendering operations are determined and controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control contents of various rendering operations are shared and determined by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the rendering operations. It may be.

  As an example, a display control board is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. The display control board only needs to be equipped with a display control CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a random number circuit, and an I / O. In this case, since the display control CPU mounted on the display control board executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The display control unit 123 may be mounted on the display control board. In the display control board, for example, the display control CPU executes a program read from the ROM, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU reads fixed data from the ROM, the display control CPU writes various variation data to the RAM and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU stores the various data in the RAM. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading various temporarily stored data, receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the display control board via the I / O display control CPU, I / O for the display controlling CPU A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board via the display is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU performs steps S521 to S526 shown in FIG. 39 based on, for example, a display control command from the effect control board 12 or an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12. Processing, variable display effect setting in step S527, processing after step S553 shown in FIG. 41, pre-reading effect determination processing in step S596 shown in FIG. 58, stick use pre-reading effect processing in step S598, repeated hit pre-reading in step S600 Either the effect process or the stick push combined use pre-read effect process in step S601 may be executed. The display control CPU only needs to execute any part of the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. Further, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a control command from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Alternatively, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12, and independent control to become the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14. The substrate may not be provided. In this case, a display control board as described above is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5, and determined or selected by the effect control CPU 120 in step S528 of FIG. 39 or step S717 of FIG. A display control command corresponding to the effect control pattern or the like may be transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the display control board. In the configuration shown in FIG. 3, any one of the processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 and the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is selected. May be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 is performed on any control board. The combination to be executed may be any combination.

  In the above embodiment, the variable display result has been described as being determined as “big hit” or “lost”. On the other hand, the variable display result can also be determined as “small hit”. At this time, the small hit gaming state is controlled, and the gaming state is not changed after the small hit gaming state ends. Also good. When the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type can be determined as “surprise accuracy”. At this time, the 2R big hit state is controlled, and after the 2R big hit state ends, the big hit type is controlled. You may make it do.

  In the 2R big hit state, the period during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player in each round (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the big winning door) is the 15R big hit state or 16R. The second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the first period in the big hit state. Further, in the 2R big hit state, the number of round executions becomes a second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the number of rounds in the 15R big hit state or the 16R big hit state. In the 2R big hit state, it is only necessary to control the number of executions of the round to be the second round number, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the 15R big hit state or the 16R big hit state. A game in the 2R big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the 2R big hit state, in a predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in each round, the predetermined winning opening serving as the big winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state, etc. The second state that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state may be returned after a predetermined period (the first period or the second period) has elapsed.

  In the small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation is performed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 for changing the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player, similarly to the 2R big hit state. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) for the second period is repeatedly executed until the second number of times (the number of executions equal to the second round number) is reached. Is done. In the small hit gaming state, similarly to the 2R big hit state, the period in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state is the second period, and the number of times of the operation to be in the first state is the second number. It may be controlled so that at least one of them is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set to the first state by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the 2R big hit state. When the winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in each round in the 2R big hit state is changed to the first state, even in the small hit gaming state, the same manner as the 2R big hit state is performed. The winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit”, a case where “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” is provided. You may do it. As an example, “suddenly short time” and “suddenly normal” are included in the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 sets the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type according to the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value as “surprise”, “suddenly short time”, “suddenly” The table data to be assigned to the “normal” jackpot type may be included. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the 2R big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and after the 2R big hit state ends. Is controlled to the time-short state (low-accuracy high-base state), unlike the case where the big hit type is “probability”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal” when the variable display result is “big hit”, the 2R big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and after the 2R big hit state ends. Is controlled in the normal state (low-probability low base state) unlike the case where the big hit type is “probability”. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to the gaming state controlled after the end of the 2R big hit state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  When such “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” are provided, a variation pattern type and variation pattern different from those other than “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” may be determined. As a result, although the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”, it is controlled to the 2R big hit state in spite of being controlled to the 15R big hit state or the 16R big hit state. This can prevent the player from feeling distrustful. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Abrupt”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start-up switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Stick controller 30A ... Control rod 31A ... Trigger button 31B ... Push button 32 ... Tilt direction sensor unit 33 ... Blower fan 34 ... Vibration motor 35A ... Trigger sensor 35B ... Push sensor 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 … ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (8)

A variable display that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other based on the establishment of a start condition that allows the start of variable display after the game medium passes through a predetermined start area and displays the display result. A gaming machine that can be provided with a predetermined gaming value based on a display result of the identification information,
Pre-determining means for determining whether or not to give the predetermined game value when the variable display start condition is satisfied;
Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a determination result of the prior determination means;
A first operation means including a direction operation unit capable of performing an instruction operation in multiple directions, and a first instruction operation unit provided at a predetermined position of the direction operation unit and allowing a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation;
A second operation means including a second instruction operation unit provided at a predetermined position separate from the direction operation unit and allowing a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation;
Based on the determination result of the variable display pattern determination means, which operation effect is to be executed among the first operation effect using the first operation device and the second operation effect using the second operation device. Production determining means to determine;
An effect executing means for executing an operation effect determined by the effect determining means among the first operation effect and the second operation effect during execution of variable display of the identification information,
The effect determining means selectively determines whether to execute the first operation effect or the second operation effect even when the variable display pattern determining means determines the same variable display pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The effect determining means selectively determines whether to execute the first operation effect or the second operation effect based on a setting by a player.
The gaming machine according to claim 1. An operation history storage means for storing an operation history for the first operation means and the second operation means by the player;
The effect determining means selectively determines whether to execute the first operation effect or the second operation effect based on the operation history stored in the operation history storage means.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that. A recognition operation means for performing a predetermined performance operation that can be recognized by the player only when performing an instruction operation on one of the first operation means and the second operation means;
While one of the first operation effects and the second operation effect among the first operation effects is executed by the effect execution means, the predetermined effect operation by the recognition operation means is started. An operation control means for restricting a predetermined effect operation by the recognition operation means when the other operation effect different from the one operation effect is executed by the effect executing means.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, 2, or 3. The effect execution means can execute a composite operation effect using both the first operation means and the second operation means based on a determination result by the effect determination means,
The effect determining means can determine the execution of the composite operation effect only when it is determined by the prior determining means that the predetermined game value is given.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that: When it is determined that the predetermined game value is to be given by the pre-determining means, before the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed, the fact that the game value has been given is notified. Further comprising a confirmed effect executing means for executing the determined effect to be performed,
When the player performs an instruction operation in the operation effect executed by the effect execution unit, the confirmed effect executing unit executes the determined effect at a timing related to the instruction operation, and the player performs an instruction operation. If this is not done, the final effect will not be executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that: The production execution means executes the second operation production in a production manner similar to the instruction operation for the second instruction operation unit in response to an instruction operation for the first instruction operation unit.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, characterized in that: The effect execution means changes the effect mode in the second operation effect according to the number of instruction operations with respect to the second instruction operation unit.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that: